Division 09 Finishes Final
Division 09 Finishes Final
Division 09 Finishes Final
H90
H90
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
110
-
150
-
155
156
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the tensile fabric roof
assembly to the structure.
- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master
programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main
Contract master programme.
157
-
160
-
EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE
Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that incorporated
components comply with specified performance.
170
-
PERFORMANCE
220
-
VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE
Reports and calculations: Based on approved laboratory testing or computer
modelling. Submit before commencement of work.
240
-
245
-
FACTOR OF SAFETY
Requirement: All components shall be designed to give minimum factor of safety:
- Permanent long term (dead load and pre-stress): 6 or greater.
- Transient short term (dead load, pre-stress and wind load): 6 or greater.
- Medium term (dead load, pre-stress and snow load): 6 or greater.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
246
-
TOLERANCE
Shall be provided for the tensile fabric roof design to enable it to be installed
within agreed limits to be set by reference to the building tolerances required by
the CA. The Contractor shall also take into account the relationship of his work
with other adjacent trades and the tolerances thereon.
247
-
MATERIALS
All materials used shall be compatible with one another and with the building
fabric. Where required between contact surfaces of concrete, galvanised or
stainless steel, or aluminium, particularly in damp conditions, a separating
membrane shall be introduced. The selection of metal types and grades, for use
in the tensile fabric roof construction shall, notwithstanding any other
requirements of this specification, take into account the requirement to prevent
the occurrence of electrolytic action between metal.
248
-
INTEGRITY
Requirement: The tensile fabric roof assembly must resist wind loads, dead loads
and design live loads, and accommodate deflections and movements without
damage.
Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2 with a minimum
design wind pressure of 1200 Pa.
Permanent imposed loads: To structural engineers direction
251
-
252
-
ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS
During the life of the tensile fabric roof assembly exposure to sunlight shall not
reduce the performance or visual appearance.
253
-
SAFETY
The finished surfaces of curtain walling in all accessible internal and external
areas must not:
- Have irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
- Release irritant or staining substances.
290
-
310
-
PRODUCT SAMPLES
Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of: Fabric (as 110),
Clamping plates (as 320), Rods (as 350) and Wire ropes (as 360) .
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
315
-
FIXING SAMPLES
General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing,
with details of methods of adjustment and tolerances.
320
-
CLAMPING PLATES
Type: Stainless Steel .
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell or equivalent and approved.
Size: To specialist contractors specification
Radius to corners/ edges in contact with fabric (minimum): To specialist
contractors specification.
Bolts: To specialist contractors specification.
Other requirements: To specialist contractors specification.
330
-
STRAPS
Type: PTFE .
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell or equivalent and approved.
Weave: To specialist contractors specification. .
Size: To specialist contractors specification.
Extension at break (maximum): To specialist contractors specification.
Attachment: To specialist contractors specification.
Other requirements: To specialist contractors specification.
350
-
RODS
Type: Stainless Steel.
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell.
Size: To specialist contractors specification.
Accessories: To specialist contractors specification.
360
-
WIRE ROPES
Type: Stainless Steel.
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell.
Size: To specialist contractors specification. .
Testing construction stretch (measured at 15% MBL): To specialist contractors
specification.
- Test results: Submit.
Accessories: To specialist contractors specification.
370
-
CORNER PLATES
Type: Stainless Steel.
Manufacturer: Architen Landrell or equivalent and approved.
Size: To specialist contractors specification.
375
-
380
-
FIXING ANCHORS
Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.
Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building
structure and curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
391
-
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
METALWORK
Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.
FABRICATION
610
-
620
-
630
-
FABRICATING PANELS
Accuracy:
- Tolerance in weft direction (maximum): 15mm.
- Tolerance in position of cable and belt lines (maximum): +0-10 mm rela.
Testing: One strip tensile test in warp and weft directions per 100 m2 of fabric.
One trapezoidal tear test in warp and weft directions per 200m
- Test results: Submit.
640
-
701
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
710
-
760
-
761
-
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
All fixings must be concealed unless indicated on final detailed drawings. Where
exposed they must match the material and finish of the products fixed.
Machine cut and drill all products in the workshop wherever possible.
Mark or tag all products to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,
storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete
installations.
Joints between frames and building surrounds shall be sealed internally where
necessary and bedded and sealed externally.
Aluminium surfaces in contact with cementitious surfaces shall be protected by a
bitumen coating to BS 3416 type 1.
ADVERSE WEATHER
Installation of fabric coverings: Unless effective temporary cover is provided,
suspend work:
- At temperatures below: 50C .
- In wet or damp conditions.
Unfinished areas of coverings: Keep dry and protect from wind action.
INSPECTION:
All fabrication and assembled units must be carefully inspected for match with
approved samples and for compliance with this specification and the final detailed
drawings before dispatch to site.
Give adequate notice of inspection arrangements to enable the CA and/or other
affected parties to be present.
PROTECTION:
All fabrications and assembled units must be protected against damage,
corrosion and disfigurement during handling, installation and subsequent site
operations.
Protective coverings must be applied before dispatch to site and must not be
detrimental to curtain walling products, finishes or installation procedures.
762
-
763
-
764
-
770
-
WELDING
Is permitted, subject to completion of a hot work permit form and compliance
with its requirements.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
775
-
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
DAMAGE
Do not repair the tensile fabric roof without approval. Such approval will not be
given where products and units are badly damaged or where the proposed repair
will impair performance or appearance.
Repairs may require additional site testing at the discretion of the CA.
Schedule repairs or record on drawings for inclusion in the maintenance manual.
COMPLETION
910
-
INSPECTION
Interim and final covering inspections: Submit report.
920
-
TESTING OF FABRIC
Standard: To the relevant parts of BS EN ISO 1421.
Timing of test: On completion of installation .
Test results: Submit on completion of testing.
925
-
926
-
930
-
DOCUMENTATION
Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties and test certificates.
940
-
COMPLETION
Cables: Not damaged, crushed or kinked.
Fabric:
- Cable cuffs: Unwrinkled.
- Colour and translucency: Consistent, free from discontinuities and
discolouration.
- Required prestress: Verified.
- Surfaces: Clean and smooth, fully sealed, weathertight and free draining.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H90
995
-
ODAC
TENSILE FABRIC COVERINGS
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
Product Reference: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and details.
Material: Typically secondary aluminium support rails, with aluminium fixed and
floating cleats as necessary. Stainless steel rivets to be used to connect the
Ceramic Granite Rainscreen System to the secondary support.
- Fasteners: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and details.
Number and Location: Consult James and Taylor for recommendations and
details.
- Backing Wall: Dense concrete blockwork.
- Thermal insulation: 100mm Rockwool Rainscreen duo insulation.
- Breather membrane: Tyvek frame wrap.
130
MATRIX 1
P1.1.1
METAL PROFILED COMPOSITE RAINSCREEN CLADDING FOR
EXTERNAL WALLS
Manufacturer and reference: PSP metal faade solutions
Unit 11, all saints industrial estate
Shildon, co. Durham, UK. DL4 2RD
TEL 01388 770 490
FAX 01388 778 068
Metal panel drained/back ventilated rainscreen cladding Structurally laminated
double skin and honeycomb core composite panel Bespoke.
Panel thickness:
Front skin
Internal skin material
Nominal 30 mm
0.9mm coloured anodised aluminium sheeting grade
EN AW-3004.
Rear skin: 0.7mm Galvatite substrate of hot dipped
zinc coated steel to BS EN 10 147
Standard white.
Core:
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
FIXING CLADDING
P2.1 Structure:
All primary structure is the responsibility of others. Contractors should note the
following:The primary structure should be designed to take all loads imposed by the cladding
system.
In order to achieve an acceptable elevational line on the finished facade the tolerances
of the primary structure must be considered.
The primary structure must be within tolerance before handover to following trades.
P2.6 Manufacturer/Installers:
The system, manufactured by PSP LTD, must be detailed and installed by a PSP
Approved Installation Contractor.
P2.6.1 Design:
All design details/specifications are to be approved by Architect/Agent before
manufacture.
P2.6.2 Production Information:
Drawings and manufacturing information will be prepared, based upon information
provided under P2.6 standard specifications and details (non-project specific) are
available on request.
P2.7 MANUFACTURING ACCURACY
P2.7.1
Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding, when erected,
complies with clause P2.8.1 and all sizes fall within the indicated permissible
deviations.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
+1.5mm
-1.5mm
+1.5mm
+2mm
-1.5mm
- 2mm
+ 1mm
- 1mm
When the longest of two adjacent sides of panel is taken as the base line, the
deviation of the shorter side measured from a perpendicular to the baseline shall
not exceed.
+1.5mm
-1.5mm
5. Flatness:
The cellular honeycomb core is cut to 0.2mm tolerance, which provides an
exceptionally flat surface for skin bonding. This method of composite assembly
provides extreme optical panel flatness.
To establish panel flatness, panels should be measured under ambient factory
temperature and humidity. The tolerances do not take into account any thermal
expansion or contraction.
Manufacture Metal skins are coated with a non-flammable, two part polyurethane based
laminating adhesive, which has a low viscosity and provides foaming to ensure
maximum coverage is achieved. The adhesive is applied by an automated
diamond bead application system which has a co-ordinated conveyor-feed
system to ensure all items achieve consistent coverage. The core is positioned
between the metal skins and the assembly is structurally bonded within a heated
platen press.
P4.1 FASTENINGS GENERALLY:
Type(s), size(s), material(s) and finish(s) as
specified, or in the absence of such specification, as recommended for the
purpose by fixing specialist, as recommended in BS 5427, clause 23.
P4.2 SUB-STRUCTURE: Contractors should note the following:The sub-structure should be designed to transfer all loads back to the primary
structure.
In order to achieve an acceptable elevational line on the finished facade, the
tolerances between the sub-structure and the primary structure must be
considered and a means of adjustment should be incorporated.
Secondary steelwork tolerance must be 5mm.
The sub-structure must be within tolerance before the installation of the cladding
system.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS STATED WITHIN THIS
DOCUMENT ARE A GENERAL GUIDE ONLY AND ARE SUBJECT TO
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
220
-
DESIGN
Rainscreen cladding system and associated features: Complete detailed design
in accordance with this specification and the preliminary design drawings and
submit before commencement of fabrication.
Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.
SPECIFICATION
Compliance standards: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology
(CWCT) Standard for systemised building envelopes.
Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep available at the
design office, workshop and on site copies of:
- The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) Standard for
systemised building envelopes.
- Publications invoked by the CWCT Standard for systemised building
envelopes.
230
-
232
-
Quality plan
Requirement: Submit during detailed design.
Content: In accordance with BS 5750 and including the following:
- Name of the quality manager.
- Quality assessment procedures.
- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.
- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.
- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off
site and on site.
- List of product information with latest revisions.
- Subcontractors involved in the work.
- Subcontractors quality plans.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
235
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
250
-
SAMPLES OF FIXINGS
General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing,
together with manufacturers' recommended torque figures.
260
-
FABRICATION SAMPLES
General: During detailed design, submit samples of: Typical honeycomb panel
and sill flashing
Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
335
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
350
-
360
-
370
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
380
-
GENERAL MOVEMENT
Requirement: Rainscreen cladding must accommodate anticipated building
movements as follows: To Structural Engineers Determination
385
-
420
-
WATER PENETRATION
Watertightness class to BS EN 12154
- Peak test pressure: To CWCT table 1.1
425
-
Wind load serviceability and safety of rainscreen panels - cyclic wind loading
Method of determination: To CWCT standard for systemised building envelopes
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
440
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
AVOIDANCE OF CONDENSATION
Requirement: Psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form
within or on the interior surface of the rainscreen wall or any surface of the wall
that is on the warm side of insulation are:
- Notional outdoor psychrometric conditions as BS 6229, table A1.
- Notional indoor psychrometric conditions:
Temperature: 20C .
Relative humidity: 50%
Vapour pressure: 1.17kPa
Winter interstitial condensate:
- Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m.
Calculated annual net retention: Nil.
450
-
495
-
DURABILITY
Relevant agents or degradation mechanisms: Coastal situation
Design life of the rainscreen cladding system: Not less than 50 years
Secondary components: Submit details together with required maintenance
regime, replacement periods and methods of replacement.
497
-
TESTING
520
-
530
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by a United Kingdom
Accreditation Service (UKAS) approved independent laboratory.
535
-
TESTING AUTHORITY
Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by the rainscreen cladding
manufacturer/ contractor and is to be witnessed and certified by: agreed with CA
665
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
672
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
680
-
685
-
PRODUCTS
710
-
712
-
715
-
717
-
720
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
725
-
730
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
732
-
ADHESIVES
General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.
735
-
760
-
765
-
770
-
GASKETS
Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.
WEATHERSTRIPPING OF OPENING UNITS
Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
- Polypropylene woven pile, silicone treated.
Installation: Fixed in undercut grooves in framing sections using preformed
corners with any joints in the length.
GENERAL SEALANTS
Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:
- Silicone to BS 5889.
- One part polysulfide to BS 5215.
- Two part polysulfide to BS 4254.
- One or two part polyurethane.
Classification and requirements: To BS EN ISO 11600.
Reaction to contact products and finishes: Stable and compatible.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
775
-
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
THERMAL INSULATION
Material: DuoSlab rock wool insulation as per drawings 06562/CD/201 - 218
- Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or
water vapour.
Fixing: Attached to the outer face or supported within the backing wall so as not
to bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of
the rainscreen cladding.
780
-
785
-
BREATHER MEMBRANE
Material: vapour permeable membrane
Manufacturer: Tyvek Housewrap
Product reference: Tyvek Housewrap (1060b)
Continuity: No breaks. Minimize joints.
- Penetrations and abutments: Attach to breather membrane with tape. Achieve
full bond.
- Laps: Not less than 150 mm, bond with tape. Achieve full bond.
Tape: As recommended by breather membrane manufacturer.
Repairs: Lapped patch of breather membrane material secured with continuous
band of tape on edges.
Junctions at flashings, sills, gutters etc. Overlap and allow free drainage to
exterior.
FINISHES
810
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
820
-
830
-
POWDER COATING
Requirement: As section Z31.
840
850
-
ANODIZING
Requirement: As section Z33.
910
-
GENERALLY
Electrolytic corrosion: Take necessary measures to prevent.
Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly,
handling, storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete
installation.
912
-
METALWORK
Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.
915
-
TIMBER TREATMENT
Requirement: As section Z12, unless specified otherwise in this section.
Exposed cut and drilled surfaces: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.
920
-
GLAZING
Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section.
Directional patterned/ wired glass: Fix generally parallel to surround and align
adjacent panes where seen together at close quarters.
922
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H92
ODAC
RAINSCREEN CLADDING
925
-
SEALANT APPLICATION
Requirement: As section Z22, unless specified otherwise in this section.
930
-
ASSEMBLY
Location: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.
Joints: Other than movement joints and designed open joints, must be rigidly
secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed with hairline abutments.
Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for
reassembly on site.
960
-
970
-
975
-
WELDING
In situ welding: Not allowed
980
-
INTERFACES
Installation: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly and neatly overlap cladding to
form a weathertight junction.
985
-
Damage
Repairs: Do not repair cladding without approval.
- Approval: Will not be given where the proposed repair will impair performance
or appearance.
Record of repairs: Prepare schedule or record on drawings for inclusion in the
maintenance manual.
995
-
Maintenance
Maintenance manual: Incorporate details within the Building Manual in
accordance with CWCT Standard for systemised building envelopes clause
7.6.1.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
K10
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
205
-
225
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
INSTALLATION
335
-
ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS
Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:
- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.
- Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and
accurately on linings.
- Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to
suit type and performance of lining.
375
-
435
-
445
455
-
CEILINGS
Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before dry lined walls and partitions.
Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with
ends staggered in adjacent rows.
Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS
Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
- Frame/ Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining
sequence across openings.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
475
-
485
-
505
-
510
-
555
-
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
560
-
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
565
-
VERTICAL JOINTS
Joints: Centre on studs.
- Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.
570
-
HORIZONTAL JOINTS
Surfaces exposed to view: Horizontal joints not permitted. Seek instructions
where height of partition/ lining exceeds maximum available length of board.
Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers by at least 600 mm.
Edges of boards: Support using additional framing.
- Two layer boarding: Support edges of outer layer.
580
-
590
-
592
-
610
-
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
620
-
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
625
-
630
-
FINISHING
650
-
670
-
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K10
680
-
695
-
725
-
ODAC
PLASTERBOARD DRY LININGS/ PARTITIONS/ CEILINGS
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
K21
ODAC
WOOD STRIP/ BOARD FINE FLOORING/ LININGS
145
-
160
-
210
-
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
Moisture content of timber supports: 12-14%.
Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified.
Protection: Protect from dirt, stains and damage using suitable coverings and
boards laid as the work proceeds.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
220
-
ODAC
WOOD STRIP/ BOARD FINE FLOORING/ LININGS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
General requirements prior to starting work specified in this section: Building
weathertight, wet trades completed and affected areas dried out.
Temperature and humidity before, during and after installing strips/ boards:
Maintained at levels approximating to those which will prevail after building is
occupied.
250
-
FIXTURES
Fixtures around which strip flooring is to be fixed: Installed before starting work
specified in this section.
260
-
270
-
330
-
FIXING BATTENS
General: Battens spaced evenly, packed or adjusted as necessary to give a true,
level, finished surface, and fixed securely.
335
-
TREATED TIMBER
Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling: Treated with two flood coats of a
solution recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.
350
-
360
-
EXPANSION PROVISION
Expansion gaps:
Edges of flooring: Parallel to lie of strips/ boards and 10mm wide.
Ends of flooring: 10 mm wide.
Spacer blocks and debris: Removed before fixing skirtings/ cover fillets.
Intermediate expansion/ movement joints: Formed as recommended by flooring
manufacturer/ supplier.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K21
380
-
ODAC
WOOD STRIP/ BOARD FINE FLOORING/ LININGS
FINISH TO LINING
Exposed fastener heads: Punched or set below surface and filled with stopping to
match wood.
Strips/ Boards: Sanded to give a clean, smooth and flush surface free from score
marks.
Finish: Clear Varnish
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K32
K32
ODAC
PANEL CUBICLES
PANEL CUBICLES
To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
120
210
230
-
250
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K32
ODAC
PANEL CUBICLES
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
K40
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
112
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
203
-
DEFINITIONS
Ceiling: Items collectively constituting the ceiling surface i.e. infill units/boards,
access units and grid.
Ceiling system: Ceiling plus suspension system and integrated services fittings.
COMPONENTS
215
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples.
217
-
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Extent of system: Include hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary
channels, perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc., which
are necessary to complete the ceiling system and achieve performance.
Materials: galvanised steel
Top fixings: as recommended by manufacturer.
Hangers: flexible.
Grid type: T15 main runner.
Finish: standard manufacturers.
Colour: white 010.
219
-
PERIMETER TRIMS
Type: Connect angle trim, finish to match main grid.
- Fixings to perimeters: plug and screw to masonry.
- Fixing centres (maximum): 450mm.
INSTALLATION
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
305
-
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
SETTING OUT
General: Accurate, continuous, even, and jointed at regular intervals.
- Soffits: Free from undulations, lipping and distortions in grid members.
Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned.
Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.
Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length.
Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes.
- Permitted deviations from nominal sizes: Allow for.
Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to
walls.
Suitability of construction:Give notice where building elements and features to
which the ceiling systems relate are not square, straight or level.
310
-
BRACING
General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling
system resistant to design loads and pressures.
315
-
PROTECTION
Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.
Ceiling materials: Remove and replace correctly using special tools and clean
gloves, etc. as appropriate.
320
-
TOP FIXING
Building structure: Verify suitability.
- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.
- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of the concrete unit and provide a
system of primary channels.
- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors.
- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.
Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.
360
-
380
-
INSTALLING HANGERS
Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.
Installation: Install vertical or near vertical without bends or kinks. Do not allow
hangers to press against fittings, services, insulation covering ducts/pipes.
Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either:
- brace diagonal hangers against lateral movement; or
- hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging across
obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.
Extra hangers: Provide as required to carry additional loads.
Fixing:
- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical
movement.
- Angle/strap hangers: Do not rivet for top fixing.
Spacings: 450mm.
INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS
Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.
- External and internal corners: Mitre joints.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
384
-
386
-
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align
adjacent lengths.
Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall or other building structure.
- Fixing centres: 450mm.
CONCEALED GRIDS
Grid fixings:
Primary support channels: Install level. Adjust level with supporting hangers taut.
Do not level by kinking or bending hangers.
- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Wrap twice and tightly form
loops.
- Angle/strap hangers: Do not rivet for bottom fixing.
Splines: Locate between infill units to level adjacent units and to resist air
movement at joints.
Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.
INSTALLING INFILL UNITS
General:
- Cut perimeter infill units: Trim to full space between last grid member and
perimeter trim. Prevent subsequent movement.
- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and colour.
In particular, avoid patchiness.
Concealed grids: Install infill units uniform, straight and aligned. Avoid dimension
creep.
- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent
movement and displacement.
387
-
390
-
395
-
INTEGRATED SERVICES
General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in
relation to the ceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of
ceiling system.
Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not
damage or distort the ceiling.
- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Match ceiling
material.
Services outlets:
- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.
- Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.
396
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
398
-
400
-
425
-
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
K40
500
-
ODAC
DEMOUNTABLE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible
materials. Adequately support services passing through the barrier.
Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting
performance of ceiling system.
Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink
barriers with ceiling system.
ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING
Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and
fully earth bonded to carry prospective earth fault currents.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of each
independent area of suspension system.
Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings,
test conductive parts of suspension system required to carry earth fault current,
or used as bonding connections. Give notice before testing.
- Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling
system and to earth bar in distribution board serving the area.
- Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault
conditions.
- Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe
duration, and indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 W and 0-20 W.
- Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings.
- Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of
the path forming the earth fault loop.
COMPLETION
520
-
USER INSTRUCTIONS
Contents: Include the following:
- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components.
- Cleaning methods and materials.
- Recommendations for redecoration.
- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent
alterations and maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance
is not impaired.
- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to
ceiling system after installation.
530
-
SPARES
General: At Practical Completion supply the following: 1 box of each of the infill
tile types.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
112
-
205
210
-
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
215
-
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or
partially bonded construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for
minimum six weeks.
SURFACE HARDNESS OF BASES TO RECEIVE POLYMER MODIFIED
WEARING SCREEDS
General: Bases must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of
wearing screeds.
Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer with
compliance values selected from the following:
- Screed thickness
Rebound hammer value
15 mm or less
Greater than 25
Greater than 15 mm
Greater than 30
Report: Submit details of areas where base surface hardness does not comply
with these values.
220
-
270
-
275
-
BATCHING/ MIXING
305
330
-
AGGREGATE STANDARDS
Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1, class 42.5 or Portland blast furnace to BS
146, class 42.5.
Sand: To BS EN 12620.
- Grading limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1.
Coarse aggregate: To BS EN 12620.
MIXING
Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to
prevent excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
335
-
Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than nofines must be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a
free fall drum type mixer.
Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site
temperatures recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.
IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)
Standards and category: To BS 8204-1, table 4.
- For testing of bonded screeds refer to Annex D.
- For testing of floating screeds refer to Annex E.
Class
conditions
A
B
C
340
-
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
Service
depth
Heavy use
Normal use
Light use
Indentation
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
ADVERSE WEATHER
Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5 C for a minimum of four days
after laying.
Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.
LAYING
345
-
355
-
392
405
GENERAL REINFORCEMENT
Type: To BS 4483, table 1: D49.
Installation: Place between the two layers of screed and lap edges minimum 100
mm. Tie securely with steel wire. Continue through daywork joints.
Corners: Avoid a four layer build at corners.
JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
Laying screeds: Lay continuously using wet screeds between strips or bays.
Minimize defined joints.
Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.
428
-
HEATED SCREEDS
Screed bays: Coordinate with heating circuits.
Heating elements: Secure properly. Prevent displacement.
Laying: Lay carefully. Compact thoroughly around heating elements. Do not
damage them.
435
-
440
-
FINISHING/ CURING
510
-
FINISHING GENERALLY
Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting
and hardening of screed material.
Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.
520
-
530
-
540
-
650
-
CURING
General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from
wind, draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently, closely
cover with polyethylene sheeting.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M10
ODAC
CEMENT BASED LEVELLING/ WEARING SCREEDS
Curing period: Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for a minimum of: 7 days.
Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to
artificial drying conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related
problems.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
140
-
210
-
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
CONTROL SAMPLES: Complete sample area, being part of the finished work, in
an approved location, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding:
One panel of external render M20/110.
423
433
438
-
449
-
ADMIXTURES:
Do not use unless specified or approved.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
453
-
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
458
461
INITIAL SET: Do not use mixes after initial set has taken place. Do not retemper
or reconstitute mixes, unless permitted by the manufacturer of proprietary mixes.
466
469
474
-
COLD WEATHER:
Do not carry out external work when air temperature is below 3C and falling or
below 1C and rising.
Take all necessary precautions to enable internal coating work to proceed without
damage when air temperature is below 3C.
Do not use frozen materials and do not apply coatings to frozen or frost bound
backgrounds.
PREPARING BACKGROUNDS
507
-
511
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
515
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
636
640
-
650
673
PLASTERING
710
-
APPLICATION GENERALLY:
Apply each coating firmly to achieve good adhesion and in one continuous
operation between angles and joints.
All coatings to be not less than the thickness specified, firmly bonded, of even
and consistent appearance, free from rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks and
crazing.
Finish surfaces to a true plane, to correct line and level, with all angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
715
720
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
set sufficiently before the next is applied. Cross scratch surface of each dubbing
out coat.
726
METAL MESH LATHING: Work undercoat well into interstices to obtain maximum
key.
731
734
CEMENT GAUGED UNDERCOATS: Allow to dry out thoroughly, but not too
rapidly, to ensure that drying shrinkage is substantially complete before applying
next coat.
737
777
SMOOTH FINISH: Trowel or float to produce a tight, matt, smooth surface with
no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks. Do not use water brush and
avoid excessive trowelling and over polishing.
778
WOOD FLOAT FINISH: Finish with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has
disappeared from surface to give an even overall texture.
RENDERING
810
-
APPLICATION GENERALLY:
Apply each coating firmly to achieve good adhesion and in one continuous
operation between angles and joints.
All coatings to be not less than the thickness specified, firmly bonded, of even
and consistent appearance, free from rippling, hollows and ridges.
Finish surfaces to a true plane, to correct line and level, with all angles and
corners to a right angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals
plumb and square.
Prevent excessively rapid or localised drying out.
815
ACCURACY of rendering to receive tiles fixed with adhesive. The variation in gap
under a 1.8 m straight edge (with feet) placed anywhere on the surface to be not
more than 3 mm.
820
-
DUBBING OUT:
If necessary to correct background inaccuracies dub out in thicknesses of not
more than 13 mm in same mix as undercoat. Total thickness of dubbing must not
exceed 25 mm unless approved otherwise.
In areas where thickness of dubbing will exceed 20 mm, first apply an approved
keying/bonding treatment.
Comb surface of each dubbing out coat. Allow each coat to set but not dry before
the next is applied.
840
UNDERCOATS GENERALLY:
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M20
ODAC
PLASTERED/RENDERED COATINGS
856
FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH: Finish with wood or other suitably
faced float to give an even, open texture. Do not apply water while working up.
Do not draw excessive laitance to surface (either by overworking or by use of
steel trowel).
880
-
DRYING:
Work in the shade and out of drying winds whenever possible.
Keep each undercoat and final coat damp for the first 3-4 days by covering with
polyethylene sheet and/or spraying with water. Hang sheeting clear of the final
coat where it is the final finish. Thereafter prevent from drying out too rapidly.
Allow each coat to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is
substantially complete before applying next coat.
890
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M21
M21
ODAC
INSULATION WITH RENDERED FINISH
INSTALLATION
410 Installation to be carried out by the system manufacturer, or by a contractor
approved by the system manufacturer.
420 ADVERSE WEATHER
Do not use frozen materials and do not apply materials to frost bound surfaces
Do not apply adhesive, mortar or render when the air temperature is at or below
5 C on a falling thermometer or below 3 C on a rising thermometer, or when the
temperature of the air or wall surface is above 30 C and the surface is not protected.
1
in
partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M21
ODAC
INSULATION WITH RENDERED FINISH
2
in
partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
112
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
112
ODAC
CERAMIC
115
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
120
-
122
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
125
-
125
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
127
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
210
-
215
-
250
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples and prepare laid finished samples for
approval.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
PREPARATION
370
-
380
-
NEW PLASTER
Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
390
-
PLASTERBOARD BACKGROUNDS
Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and face to receive
decorative finish exposed.
400
-
BACKGROUNDS ______
Boards: Dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings.
Surfaces to be tiled: Seal or prime if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
410
-
420
-
430
-
431
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
438
-
444
-
450
460
-
SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT
Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.
FIXING
510
-
530
-
FIXING GENERALLY
Colour/ shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/ room are
not permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
Adhesive: Compatible with background/ base. Prime if recommended by
adhesive manufacturer.
Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/ base and tile backs.
Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to
give true, regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting
conditions.
Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing
tiles.
SETTING OUT
Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively.
Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.
Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.
Movement joints: Where locations are not indicated, submit proposals.
540
-
550
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
560
-
570
-
MORTAR BEDDING
Bedding mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand for walls: To BS 1199, type A.
- Sand for floors: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading designation: 0/4 (MP) category 1 fines and between 20%-66%
passing a 0.5 sieve.
Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established
weight:volume relationships of the particular materials. Use accurate gauge
boxes. Allow for bulking of damp sand.
Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistence. Use a suitable forced
action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type mixer.
Application: At normal temperatures use within two hours. Do not use after initial
set. Do not retemper.
578
-
580
-
POROUS TILES
Tiles to be bedded in cement:sand: Soak in clean water for at least 30 minutes.
Fix as soon as surface water has drained.
590
-
600
-
610
-
650
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
651
670
690
-
710
720
-
730
-
ODAC
CERAMIC
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M40
ODAC
CERAMIC
855
875
-
GROUTING
Sequence: Grout when bed/ adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of
tiles.
Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from
blemishes.
Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.
885
-
COLOURED GROUT
Staining of tiles: Not permitted
Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If
discoloration occurs apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.
920
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
TERRAZZO TILING/ IN SITU TERRAZZ
125
-
210
-
SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES
General: Suitably dry and clean for specified bedding method.
Existing substrates: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.
New in situ concrete substrates: Allow for initial shrinkage:
- Air drying after curing (minimum): 6 weeks.
- Other methods: Submit proposals.
230
-
SAMPLES
General: Submit representative samples for approval.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
TERRAZZO TILING/ IN SITU TERRAZZ
235
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
General: Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
238
-
ANTISTATIC PERFORMANCE
Electrical resistance of flooring upper limit:
- Average value (maximum): 2 megohms.
- Single point (maximum): 5 megohms.
Electrical resistance of flooring lower limit:
- Average value (minimum): 50,000 ohms.
- Single point (minimum): 20,000 ohms.
242
-
CEMENT
Standard: To BS EN 197-1.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I. or Portland slag cement, CEM II/ B-S.
- Strength class: 42.5.
Certification: BSI Kitemark scheme.
245
-
SAND
Standard: To BS EN 13139.
248
-
ADMIXTURES
Water reducing and set retarding admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible
with other mortar constituents.
LAYING
340
-
430
-
IN SITU TERRAZZO
Mixing terrazzo materials: Before adding water, mix in a dry state to a uniform
colour and with even distribution of different size aggregates.
- Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction.
Bedding: Compact thoroughly.
Terrazzo: Lay on layer of wet slurry and compact level with the dividing strips.
- Timing: To achieve effective bond to bedding.
- Slurry type: 1:1 Cement:fine sand.
Surfaces: Free from excess laitance.
- Aggregate: Regularly distributed with minimum amount of cement matrix
visible.
440
-
DIVIDING STRIPS
To manufacturers recommendations
Installation: Set to required finished floor level.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M41
ODAC
TERRAZZO TILING/ IN SITU TERRAZZ
445
-
520
-
GRINDING
Mechanical grinding: Use wet process. Dry process permitted only where it is not
practicable to use wet process.
Coarse grinding: Remove surface grout, correct unevenness and remove lipping.
- Residue and dust: Remove. Wash and rinse surface.
Holes: Fill with matching grout.
Polishing: Use wet process.
- Residue and dust: Remove. Wash and rinse surface and leave to dry naturally.
Protection: Cover flooring and keep free from traffic for at least two days.
COMPLETION
525
-
532
-
540
-
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
ODAC
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
155
-
210
-
220
-
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY
Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease,
dirt and other contaminants.
Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and
free from air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
SAMPLES
Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each
type.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
ODAC
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
250
330
-
COMMENCEMENT
Required condition of works prior to laying materials:
- Building is weathertight and well dried out.
- Wet trades have finished work.
- Paintwork is finished and dry.
- Conflicting overhead work is complete.
- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are
to be cut are fixed.
Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
340
-
350
360
-
CONDITIONING
Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where
they are to be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll
carpet and keep flat on a supporting surface.
Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by
manufacturer with time extended by a factor of two for materials stored or
transported at a temperature of less than 10C immediately prior to laying.
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain
approximately at levels which will prevail after building is occupied.
Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.
FLOORS WITH UNDERFLOOR HEATING
Commencement of laying: Not before a period of 48 hours after heating has been
turned off.
Post laying start up of heating system: Slowly return heating to its operative
temperature not less than 48 hours after completing laying.
PREPARING BASES
410
-
NEW BASES
Suitability of bases and conditions within any area:
Commencement of laying of coverings will be taken as acceptance of suitability.
430
-
440
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
460
-
ODAC
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other
blemishes. Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.
SMOOTHING/ LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT COMPOUND
Selection: As recommended by covering manufacturer.
LAYING COVERINGS
620
-
COLOUR CONSISTENCY
Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.
640
-
650
-
SEAMS
Patterns: Matched.
Joints: Tight without gaps.
670
-
680
-
720
-
DOORWAYS
Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.
780
-
COMPLETION
820
-
FINISHING TO LINOLEUM
Cleaning operations:
- Wash floor with water containing neutral (pH 6-9) detergent. If necessary,
lightly scrub heavily soiled areas.
- Rinse with clean water, removing surplus to prevent damage to adhesive.
Allow to dry.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M50
880
-
ODAC
RUBBER/ PLASTICS/ CORK/ LINO/ CARPET TILING/ SHEETING
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
215
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
220
-
COMPATIBILITY
Coating materials selected by contractor:
- Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions
of exposure.
- Compatible with each other.
- Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant
pretreatments.
280
-
PROTECTION
Wet paint signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other
operatives and general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
300
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
General: Carry out sample areas of finished work, including preparation:
Approval of appearance: Obtain approval of client before commencement of
general coating work.
321
-
400
-
420
425
-
PREPARATION GENERALLY
To BS 6150, Section 4.
Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the
coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
Efflorescence salts: Remove.
Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/substrates
has occurred.
Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill with stoppers/fillers. Work well in
and finish off flush with surface. Abrade to a smooth finish.
- Water based stoppers and fillers: Apply before priming unless recommended
otherwise by manufacturer. If applied after priming, patch prime.
- Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
Surface irregularities: Abrade to a smooth finish.
Dust, particles and residues from abrasion: Remove.
Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating. Prime
resulting bare areas.
FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
Before commencing work: Remove the following:
All signage, noticeboards, advertising boards, etc.
On completion of coating work: Refix.
IRONMONGERY
Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
Hinges: Do not remove.
On completion of coating work: Refix.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
471
-
PREPRIMED TIMBER
Defective primer: Abrade back to bare timber.
Bare areas: Reprime.
481
-
UNCOATED TIMBER
General: Abrade to a smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges lightly
rounded or eased.
Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.
Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.
500
-
PREPRIMED STEEL
Defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Abrade back to bare metal.
Bare areas: Reprime.
511
-
521
-
531
-
541
-
UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/COPPER/LEAD
Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly abrade.
Pretreatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system manufacturer.
560
-
UNCOATED CONCRETE
Release agents: Remove.
570
-
UNCOATED MASONRY/RENDERING
Loose and flaking material: Remove.
580
-
UNCOATED PLASTER
Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.
Overtrowelled polished areas: Abrade lightly.
590
-
UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD
Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/fillers.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
645
-
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
APPLICATION
711
-
COATING GENERALLY
Application: To BS 6150, Section 5.
Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during
application and drying.
Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by
manufacturer.
Priming coats: Of adequate thickness and to suit surface porosity. Apply as soon
as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
Finish: Even, smooth and of uniform colour. Free from brush marks, sags, runs
and other defects. Cut in neatly.
720
-
PRIMING JOINERY
Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces before priming.
End grain: Liberally coat, allow to soak in and then recoat.
730
-
731
-
751
-
STAINING TIMBER
Primer: Apply if recommended by stain manufacturer.
Stain: Apply in flowing coats. Brush out excess stain before set. Produce uniform
depth of colour.
760
-
VARNISHING TIMBER
First coat: Thin with white spirit. Brush well in and lay off avoiding aeration.
Subsequent coats: Rub down lightly between coats along the grain.
770
-
EXTERNAL DOORS
Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.
782
BEAD GLAZING: Joinery which is to be painted must have the primer and one
undercoat applied to rebates and beads before glazing.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
M60
ODAC
PAINTING/CLEAR FINISHING
800
-
GLAZING
Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to
protect from contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.
810
-
WATER REPELLENT
Application: Liberally flood surface, giving complete and even coverage.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
110
-
FIXING GENERALLY: Use fixing and jointing methods and types, sizes,
quantities and spacings of fasteners which are suitable having regard to:
Nature of and compatibility with product/material being fixed and fixed to,
Recommendations of manufacturers of fasteners and manufacturers of
components, products or materials being fixed and fixed to,
Materials and loads to be supported,
Conditions expected in use,
Appearance, this being subject to approval.
121
130
-
140
FIXING THROUGH FINISHES: Ensure that fasteners and plugs (if used) have
ample penetration into the backing.
150
-
PACKINGS:
Provide suitable, tight packings at fixing points to take up tolerances and prevent
distortion.
Use noncompressible, rot proof, noncorrodible materials positioned adjacent to
fixing points.
Ensure that packings do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with sealant.
155
-
ELECTROLYTIC CORROSION:
Installation shall avoid contact between dissimilar metals in positions where this
will permit electrolytic corrosion. In external construction or other positions which
are subject to contact with moisture, stainless steel fixings or components shall
be fixed with stainless steel screws and both shall be of a corrosion resistant
austenitic grade. In the same external or moist conditions galvanised steel fixings
or components shall be fixed with galvanised or sheradised steel screws.
160
-
CRAMP FIXING:
When not specified otherwise, position cramps not more than 150 mm from each
end of frame sections and at 600 mm maximum centres.
Secure cramps to frames with matching screws as masonry work proceeds, and
fully bed in mortar.
170
-
NAILING:
Nails: To BS 1202.
In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unless specified
otherwise.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.
Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
180
210
-
PLUGS:
Proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and
conditions expected in use.
Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
220
-
SCREW FIXING:
Screws: To BS 1210.
All screws to have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all screws
into hardwood to have pilot holes about half the diameter of the shank.
Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws precut the thread
with a matching steel wood screw.
Do not hammer screws unless specifically designed to be hammered.
Drive countersunk heads flush with timber surface, or not less than 2 mm below it
if they are to be stopped.
Washers and screw cups, where specified, to be of the same material as the
screw.
230
240
250
-
510
-
ADHESIVES:
Adhesive types: As specified in the relevant section.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z20
ODAC
FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Surfaces to receive adhesive to be sound, unfrozen, free from dust, grease and
any other contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces
using methods and materials recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Adjust surface regularity and texture as necessary to suit bonding and gap filling
characteristics of adhesive.
Ensure that operatives observe manufacturer's and statutory requirements for
storage and safe usage of adhesives.
Do not use adhesives in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the
storage period recommended by the manufacturer.
Apply adhesives using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correct
coverage. Bring surfaces together within recommended time period and apply
pressure evenly over full area of contact to ensure full bonding.
Remove surplus adhesive using methods and materials recommended by
adhesive manufacturer and without damaging surfaces.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z22
Z22
ODAC
SEALANTS
SEALANTS
To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
120
-
130
-
160
-
SUITABILITY OF JOINTS
Presealing checks:
- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.
- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.
Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification. Inform CA if
joints are not suitable to receive sealant and submit proposals for rectification.
PREPARING JOINTS
Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:
- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil,
grease, surface water and contaminants that may affect bond.
- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with
primer or sealant.
Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
- Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth,
without stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.
Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.
APPLYING SEALANTS
Ensure that operatives observe manufacturers and statutory requirements for
storage and safe use of sealants.
Use equipment and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer and apply
within the recommended application life of primer and sealant, and the
recommended air and substrate temperature ranges.
Do not apply to damp surfaces (unless recommended otherwise), to surfaces
affected by ice or snow or during inclement weather. Do not heat joints to dry
them or raise the temperature.
Fill joints completely, leaving no gaps, excluding all air and ensuring firm
adhesion of sealant to required joint surfaces. Tool the sealant to a neat, slightly
concave profile unless specified otherwise.
Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
POWDER COATINGS
To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
15
25
-
45
50
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
55
120
211
-
212
-
221
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
230
-
CONTROL SAMPLES
Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of
appearance for:
- Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to
be used, showing any colour, texture and gloss variation.
- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected
and how any cut metal edges are protected.
241
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
250
-
COMPONENT DESIGN
Condition of components to be powder coated:
- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4.
- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.
- Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.
310
-
PRETREATMENT
Condition of components to be powder coated:
- Free from corrosion and damage.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment and powder coating process.
Process: Clean, conversion coat, condition, rinse in demineralised water, drain
and dry components in accordance with the powder coating manufacturers
requirements and the pretreatment suppliers recommendations.
430
-
435
-
440
-
450
-
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Z31
ODAC
POWDER COATINGS
460
-
STEEL FABRICATIONS
Unit assembly: Wherever practical, before powder coating.
Exposure of uncoated background metal: Not acceptable.
Assembly sealants: Compatible with powder coatings. Obtain approval of colour if
sealants are visible after fabrication.
470
-
FIXINGS
Exposed metal fixings: Powder coat together with components, or coat with
matching repair paint system applied in accordance with the powder coating
manufacturers recommendations.
480
-
510
-
PROTECTION
Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling
and installation, or by subsequent site operations.
Protective coverings: Must be:
- Resistant to weather conditions.
- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.
Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:
- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.
- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating
manufacturers recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues.
Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or
deficiency.
530
-
540
-
COMPLETION
Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with
procedures detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.
- Duration: From removal of protection until Practical Completion.
550
-
MAINTENANCE
Supply for compilation as part of the employers maintenance manual, sufficient
copies of detailed instructions covering cleaning and maintenance requirements
of finished surfaces.
Number of copies to CA instruction.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this Section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment, scaffolding and
materials and performing all operations in connection with internal plastering and external rendering.
1 01 01
01.0
Section Includes
Cement based plaster,
1 01 04
Related Sections
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
ASTM C 22 : 00
ASTM C 28 : 00
ASTM C 35 : 01
Plaster
ASTM C 59: 00
Plaster
ASTM C 61: 95
ASTM C 88: 99
ASTM C 305: 99
ASTM C 471M: 96
ASTM C 472: 99
ASTM C 587: 97
ASTM C 631: 95
Plastering
ASTM C 841: 99
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
ASTM C 842: 99
ASTM C 843: 99
ASTM C 847: 95
ASTM C 897: 00
Based Plasters
ASTM C 926: 98
ASTM C 932: 98
Plastering
ASTM C 1063: 99
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 1191: 73
BS 1199: 76
BS 1369 -1: 87
BS 1449
BS 1449-1: 91
BS 1449-2: 83
BS 1521: 72
BS 3797: 90
BS 4887-1: 86
BS 6452-1: 84
Beads
BS 8000-10: 95
1 02 01 07
German Standards
DIN 18550-1: 85
DIN 18550-2: 85
1 02 02
Codes
BS 5262: 91
BS 5492: 90
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Admixture - material other than aggregate, cement or water, added to the binder to modify the
properties of the plaster or rendering.
Anhydrite - the mineral consisting primarily of anhydrous calcium sulphate (CaSO4) from which
the water of crystallisation has been removed by heating
Base coat - see scratch coat
Bead - profiled corrosion resistant lightweight metal section that is incorporated in plasterwork
and serves as a guide, former or reinforcement (e.g. angle bead, edge bead, depth bead, joint
bead etc.)
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
The thickness shall be 8 -10 mm. If the background is level and of even suction, thickness of
plaster may be reduced to a minimum of 5 mm.
Perlite - a lightweight aggregate produced from siliceous volcanic glass expanded by heat.
Plaster of Paris - see calcined gypsum
Plaster or plastering screed - narrow band of hardened plaster used as a thickness and
alignment guide when applying a plaster coat.
Projection plaster - one-coat in which the plaster is applied by high velocity projection and
subsequently worked with tools to obtain a smooth surface finish
Rendering - external cement based plaster
Retempering - addition of water and re-mixing of plaster which has lost workability
Ready-mixed plaster - referring to material combinations that have been formulated and dryblended by the manufacturer, only addition and mixing with water
Rough cast - a rough finish produced by throwing on a wet mix containing a proportion of coarse
aggregate.
Scraped finish - treatment of the surface of the final coat, at the appropriate stage of setting, with
a steel brush or a similar professional tool to produce a scraped finish.
Scratch coat - the first coat of a plaster applied to a surface, raked and scratched to form a
mechanical key with the following coat
Setting coat - see finishing coat
Spatter dash - see dash bond coat
Spattered (spray textured) finish - the final coat is spattered on by a machine. The texture is
determined by the type of machine and the mix. (mostly proprietary material)
Set or setting - the hardening and hydration of a plaster
Smooth trowelled finish - a finish resulting from steel trowelling with a minimum of water after
the plaster has become firm. A smooth finish free of trowel marks, blemishes or other
imperfections
Straight edge - a rigid, straight piece of wood or metal used to strike off or screed a surface to
proper grade or to check the plainness of a finished surface
Texture - any surface appearance as contrasted to a smooth surface
Three (3) coat work - application of plaster in three (3) successive coats (two undercoats and
one finishing coat) with time between coats for setting or drying, Overall thickness shall be at
least 19 mm unless otherwise indicated. A spatter dash is not part of a three (3) coat work.
Trowel textured finish - treatment of the surface of the final coat, at the appropriate stage of
setting, with different tools.
Two (2) coat work - application of plaster that is formed of one undercoat (scratch coat) and one
finishing coat. Overall thickness shall be at least 13 mm unless otherwise indicated. A spatterdash is not part of a two (2) coat work.
Undercoat - first (scratch) coat in a two coat or first (scratch) and second (brown) coat in a three
coat plaster work. A spatter dash is not defined as an undercoat.
Vermiculite - a lightweight aggregate produced from micaceous material when exfoliated by heat
1 03 02
Q.C.
Abbreviations
Quality Control
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of section 01300, the following shall be
submitted thirty (30) days before plastering and rendering works are scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Product data consisting of manufacturers product specification and installation instructions for
each product to be furnished and installed, including data showing compliance with the
requirements.
For initial selection purpose manufacturers colour charts consisting of actual units or sections of
units showing full range of colours, textures, and pattern available for each type of plaster finish
indicated.
1 05 02
Shop drawings
1 05 03
Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples of each item of adequate size and construction, in sets
showing full range of variations expected.
In addition, the Contractor shall fabricate mock-up panels 1,0 m by 1,0 m, at locations indicated
or directed by the Engineer, for each type of plaster finish and application required to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate compliance with specification and
referenced standards.
Mock-up panels shall be erected in presence of the Engineer in full thickness using materials
indicated for final work and shall demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects including
colour, surface smoothness, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work.
Engineers approval of mock-ups shall be obtained before start of plasterwork.
Mock-ups shall be retained and maintained during construction in undisturbed condition as a
standard for acceptance or rejection of completed plaster work.
When directed by the Engineer, mock-ups shall be demolished and removed from the project site.
1 05 04
1 05 06
Other Submittals
Manufacturers certificates of compliance, not more than 12 months old, showing compliance with
referenced standards, for ready-mixed plaster, and miscellaneous materials.
Manufacturers instructions for the application of ready-mixed plasters.
1 06 Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e. indicating day,
month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or supplier if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3)
days after testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure tractability.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for checking and
testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5)
years of documented experience in plasterwork and shall have successfully completed plaster
applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with the material and application procedures necessary and shall be
skilled and trained.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors Internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification
and referenced standards prior to first delivery.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with
supply order and specification.
Checking of labels and the condition of material and components of each delivery, in particular to
ensure that:
- Materials and components are clean, undamaged and dry
- Where a surface is not to be decorated, sufficient supplies of consistent materials are
available to exclude colour variations.
- Plaster is of the right type for the type of background to which it is to be applied.
- Sands, if required, are clean and sharp.
- Metal lathings are of specified type and that they are corrosion resistant.
- All fixings e.g. nails, staples, tying, wire etc. are corrosion resistant and compatible with
the type of lathing.
Checking if plants and tools are in a clean and serviceable condition at least every week.
Checking the suitability of background provided for the type of plaster to be applied prior to first
application.
Checking of correct storage of material at least every week.
All packaged material shall be delivered in factory-sealed, unopened, and unbroken bags,
packages, containers or bundles.
Bulk materials shall be delivered in clean transport vessels, free of contaminates.
1 07 02
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Lathing, beads, fixings, building paper and similar associated items shall be stored off ground and
protected from damage and contamination.
Dust Control
Dust on and near work shall be controlled by use of all means necessary if such dust is caused
by Contractors operations during performance of work.
1 08 02 02
Pollution Control
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or
other harmful materials.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Part 2: Products
2 01 Basic Materials
2 01 01
Cement
Cement shall comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96
2 01 02
Lime
Lime for cement based plaster shall contain not more than 8% by weight of unhydrated oxide and
shall comply with one of the following standards:
ASTM C 206 or BS 890 or DIN 106 or an equivalent standard.
Lime for gypsum based plaster shall comply with one of the following standards:
ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 5 or BS 890 or DIN 106 or an equivalent standard.
2 01 03
Gypsum
Gypsum shall be calcinated gypsum with a purity of not less than 66% by weight of CaSO4 1/2
H2O when tested in accordance with ASTM C 471 unless otherwise indicated.
2 01 04
Aggregate
2 01 04 01
Sand shall be natural sand resulting from the natural disintegration of rock or from the crushing of
friable limestone or manufactured sand resulting from crushing and classification by screening of
rock, gravel or blast furnace slag in compliance with ASTM C 35, ASTM C 842 or BS 1199 type 1.
Grading shall comply with one of the following Tables of Annex 6: Table 1, Table 2, Table 3,
Table 4
Perlite aggregate shall have a weight of 96 -192 kg/m3 and shall comply with ASTM C 35 or
ASTM 842 C as appropriate or BS 3797.
Vermiculite aggregate shall have a weight of 96 - 160 kg/m3 and grading shall comply with ASTM
C 35 or ASTM C 842 as appropriate or BS 3797.
Other standards, approved by the Engineer, may be used as material references, provided that
material characteristics and durability are at least equal in performance to those standards
indicated.
2 01 04 02
2 01 04 02 01 General
Aggregates shall be natural sand resulting from the natural disintegration of rock or manufactured
sand resulting from crushing and classification by screening of rock, gravel or blast furnace slag
in compliance with ASTM C 897.
Aggregates shall be sound. The loss of weight shall not exceed 20% when sodium sulphate is
used or 15% when magnesium sulphate is used for a soundness test in compliance with ASTM C
88.
If lightweight aggregate are used they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 35.
Other standards, approved by the Engineer, may be used as material references provided that
material characteristics and durability are at least equal in performance to those standards
indicated.
2 01 04 02 02
Base Coats
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 04 02 03
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Finish Coats
Grading shall comply with base coat grading, except that all aggregate shall pass the 2,36 mm
sieve as indicated in Table 6, Annex 6.
2 01 04 02 04
External Rendering
Grading of sand for external rendering shall comply with Table 5, 6 or 7 of Annex 6.
2 01 06
Water
Water used in mixing, application, and finishing plaster shall be clean, fresh and suitable for
domestic water consumption and free of such amounts of mineral or organic substances that may
affect the set, the plaster, or any metal accessory incorporated in the work.
2 02 Miscellaneous Materials
2 02 01
Metal Lath
Metal Lath shall be fabricated from steel sheet and shall comply with the following:
01.0
01.1
paper backed,
01.2
01.3
02.0
847,
Galvanized flat rib metal lath, 9,5 mm thick, in compliance with ASTM C
02.1
paper backed,
02.2
02.3
02.4
03.0
Galvanized (grade G 275) expanded, corrugated or ribbed metal lath, for
internal use, minimum weight 1,60 kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
04.0
Galvanized (grade G 450) ribbed lath, for external use, minimum weight
2,22 kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
0.5
stainless steel expanded metal lath, for external use, minimum weight 1,09
kg/ m2, in compliance with BS 1369.
06.0
stainless steel ribbed lath, for external use, in compliance with BS 1369,
06.1
06.2
2 02 02
Plaster Beads
Beads for internal plaster shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel, steel grade Z2, zinc
coating grade G275 minimum in compliance with BS 6452 or an equivalent standard. The
nominal material thickness shall be not less than 0,45 mm.
Flanges and wings of the beads shall be perforated or expanded to provide a mechanical key,
with straight or scalloped edges.
Depth of beads shall be co-ordinated with thickness and number of plaster coats required.
Beads for external rendering shall be stainless steel with a corrosion resistance at least equal to
grade 304 of BS 1449-2 or galvanized steel with an equivalent corrosion resistance. The nominal
material thickness shall be not less than 0,40 mm.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
2 02 03
Strip Reinforcement
Strip reinforcement shall be smooth-edge strips of galvanized expanded metal lath, glass-fibre or
an equivalent material approved by the Engineer, suitable to reinforce joints between dissimilar
plaster bases.
2 02 04
Movement Beads
Control and movement joint profiles shall be one-piece type, prefabricated, and folded, in Mshaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges, protected with a removable tape on
plaster face.
Material shall be galvanized mild steel for internal plastering and stainless steel at least equal to
grade 304 of BS 1449 or galvanized steel with equivalent corrosion resistance for external
rendering.
For other type of movement joints see Section 5810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
2 02 05
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Bonding agents shall be a film-forming composition, suitable for brush, roller, or spray application
and shall be tinted to show by visual inspection where it has been applied.
Bonding agents shall be non-toxic and non-flammable.
Bonding agents for external rendering shall comply with ASTM C 932 or an equivalent standard.
Bonding agents for internal plastering shall comply with ASTM C 631 or an equivalent standard.
2 02 06
Pigments
Pigments shall be stable, unaffected by lime or exposure to light and shall have no adverse effect
upon cement or other constituents of the plaster or rendering.
2 02 07
Plasticizers
Plasticizers to improve workability shall comply with BS 4887 Part 1 or an equivalent standard or
may be a proprietary product certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
2 02 08
Building Paper
General
All plaster shall be proportioned and mixed in accordance with referenced tables and
accompanying requirements unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Before first application, trial mixes shall have shown acceptable results.
Mixes shall be proportioned by volume, using measuring gauges of known volume with
successive batches proportioned alike.
Factory-prepared mixes (ready-mixed) shall require the addition of water only.
Admixtures shall be proportioned, mixed, and applied in accordance with written instructions and
directions of the manufacturer and when trial mixes have shown acceptable results.
Plaster mixes that has stiffened and lost workability because of evaporation of water shall not be
re-tempered and discarded off site immediately.
All plaster shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
2 03 02
2 03 02 01
Spatter-dash mixes to provide a key on smooth backgrounds shall consist of one (1) part Portland
cement and one to two (1 - 2) parts of sharp, coarse sand mixed to a creamy consistency with
water.
A bonding agent to provide a mechanical key may be incorporated if appropriate and approved by
the Engineer.
The mix shall be kept well stirred to prevent segregating.
2 03 02 02
Base coat plaster mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 8 or 9 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 03
Base coat rendering mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 10 or 11 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 04
Finish coat plaster mixes (by volume) shall comply with Table 12 or13 of Annex 6.
2 03 02 05
2 03 03
2 03 03 01
02.0
03.0
Aggregates when added shall not exceed proportions given in Table 16, Annex 6.
2 03 03 02
02.0
Lime putty gauged with gypsum gauging plaster in compliance with
ASTM C 28.
03.0
04.0
Gypsum casting and moulding plaster in compliance with ASTM C 59
colour as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturers standard
colour chart by the Engineer.
05.0
06.0
07.0
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
Before applying plaster, the Contractor shall ensure
- That backgrounds are sound, stable, and free from contamination and reasonably dry.
- That backgrounds are true and even in line and plumb. The plane tolerance shall not exceed 3
mm per m for solid backgrounds such as masonry, stone, in- situ and precast concrete.
- That backgrounds provide an adequate mechanical key.
- That work of earlier trades have been completed.
- That all corrodible metallic surfaces are protected against corrosion.
If the background is considered to be unsuitable, the Engineer shall be informed in writing. In no
case plaster and rendering shall be applied until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
Concrete fins or projecting joint mortar shall be removed or trimmed back even with the surface of
the background. Dissimilar materials e.g. metallic ties, reinforcing steel etc. shall be cut back at
least 3 mm below the surface and treated with a corrosion-resistant coating.
Form release agents shall be cleaned off, rinsed with water and surface allowed to dry.
Surface salts shall be removed by dry brushing. If the efflorescence is significant, the brushing
shall be repeated at 48 hours intervals.
On solid bases such as insitu- or precast concrete, where bond to plaster depends on its ability to
absorb water (suction) and surface roughness (mechanical key) one of the following shall be
applied as approved by the Engineer:
- Sandblasting, steel wire brushing, chipping or a combination of these.
- Application of a bonding agent suitable for exterior or interior exposure in accordance
with manufacturers written directions.
All surfaces shall be brushed down with a hard broom to remove dust and loose particles.
All existing work and components which are liable to be damaged during plastering and rendering
operations shall be protected.
If the building to be plastered is subjected to hot dry winds and not yet glazed, all openings shall
be screened with cheesecloth or similar materials to prevent rapid drying-out.
3 03 Application
3 03 01
General
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
All cement-based final coats shall be applied only to cement based undercoats, of comparable
strength, which have dried out thoroughly.
Plaster thickness specified shall be used for normal plasterwork unless greater thickness is
required for the purpose of overcoming variations in the background. Thickness given will not
apply to thin coat proprietary plasters, which shall be applied to the thickness recommended by
the plaster manufacturer.
Cement based plaster and rendering shall be wood float finished unless otherwise indicated.
Where plaster abuts other construction materials or openings, such as wood or metal door or
window frames etc., a separation shall be provided to produce a continuous small joint of uniform
depth and width. The joint shall be sealed with an appropriate sealant certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Small pipes, conduits, etc. in chases shall be isolated from plaster by covering the chase with a
strip of metal lathing securely fixed along each edge with corrosion resistant nails or screws at
least at 300 mm centres.
Where a plaster or rendering coat is continuous and joints are not expressed in the finish,
discontinuity in any featureless flat plane shall be avoided as far as practical. Day-work joints
(cold joints) shall be combined where possible into features or changes of direction.
Plaster screeds shall be installed on hand-applied plastered and rendered surfaces.
Plaster shall not be applied when ambient air temperature is above 35 deg. C. and in hot drying
winds.
External surfaces shall be protected with burlap or similar material after rendering has been
applied.
3 03 02
Spatter-dash
High suction bases shall be dampened with clean water prior to application of spatter-dash.
The spatter-dash shall be applied by dashing the mix on to the surface to give a complete
coverage with a rough texture of about 3 mm thickness. It shall be left untrowelled.
The spatter-dash shall be dampened periodically over one day until it has set and then shall be
allowed to dry.
3 03 03
Plaster shall be applied to an entire wall, ceiling, or soffit panel without interruption to avoid cold
joints and abrupt changes in the uniform appearance of succeeding coats.
High suction bases such as concrete masonry, porous clay bricks, etc. shall be dampened with
clean water prior to application of plaster or rendering. Low suction solid bases such as dense
concrete shall not be dampened.
Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to permit each coat to set before the next coat is
applied.
The first undercoat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form a good bond and
to cover the background completely. Before the coat has set, it shall be double backed with
material of the same proportions to bring the coat to the required thickness. After being flattened
with a straight edge the surface shall be left porous and sufficiently rough to provide a mechanical
key for the second undercoat or final coat.
Final coats shall be trowelled to a true and even surface free from slick spots, catfaces, and other
blemishes or irregularities.
Internal plastering shall be applied as one-coat, two-coat, or three-coat work as indicated. The
thickness of plaster shall comply with Table 17, Annex 6 unless otherwise indicated.
The surface of gypsum based final coats shall be steel trowelled finish and of cement-based final
coats wood float finish unless otherwise indicated.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 04
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Application of first undercoat shall be carried out in two operations. First, a tight thin coat shall be
applied using considerable pressure on the float. This shall be followed quickly by a second
application to bring the coat to the required thickness.
The thickness of the first undercoat shall be as uniform as possible and shall be not less than 8
mm and not more than 12 mm thick.
The surface shall be flattened with a straight edge and surface texture left open.
If the undercoat is to receive a hand-applied finish coat, the surface shall be scratched. The
surface shall not be scratched, however, when it is to receive a machine-applied finish, instead,
after being levelled with a straight edge, it shall be lightly rubbed with a wooden float.
When rendering on a background which has been coated with a bonding agent, the undercoat
shall be applied while the bonding agent is still wet unless otherwise indicated by written
instructions of the bonding agent manufacturer.
Before applying a second undercoat (if any), the first undercoat shall be brushed down to remove
any dust and loose particles and if dry, it shall be lightly and uniformly wetted. The second
undercoat shall be 6 - 10 mm thick unless it is to receive a machine-applied final coat. In this
case, the second coat (if any) shall be as thick as recommended by the manufacturer of the final
coat.
Before applying the final coat, the undercoat(s) shall be allowed to set and to dry out sufficiently
to provide an adequate key.
The suction of the undercoat(s) shall be reduced by uniformly wetting.
The final coat shall be applied from top to bottom unless otherwise required by instructions of the
rendering manufacturer.
For wood float finishes, the final coat shall be thinner than the undercoat and shall be applied with
a laying trowel.
Other surfaces of the final coat shall be applied in compliance with manufacturers written
instructions.
External rendering shall be applied as two or three coats to the thickness as indicated.
The surface finish of the final coat shall be as indicated.
3 03 05
Plaster Beads
Plaster beads shall be installed where indicated, and if not indicated, at locations as
recommended by the referenced standards and the plaster manufacturer.
Plaster beads shall fixed with dabs of plaster or corrosion resistant nails or screws at not more
than 600 mm centres.
Beads shall be fixed in such a manner that flanges and clips are completely embedded in the
plaster.
If dabs are used, they shall be of the same material as the base coat.
3 03 06
All wire ties shall be twisted tight and the ends of tying wire shall be bent away from the finish
face of the plaster.
All metal lathing shall be fixed so that it is taut and securely fixed.
Where areas of galvanized metal lath are damaged or at cuts, a coat of bituminous paint shall be
applied.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 07
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Dissimilar Backgrounds
At junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane which are to be plastered or
rendered, a metal lath or glass-fibre strip reinforcement or an equivalent reinforcement shall be
fixed over junctions or a separation at lines of junctions shall be formed by plaster beads as
approved by the Engineer.
If lathing is used, it shall be fixed securely over building paper with corrosion resistant nails or
screws. Over single junctions lathing shall be not less than 300 mm wide and fixed along each
edge at approx. 300 mm centres. The fixings shall be staggered. Over columns and beams and
similar constructions not wider than 450 mm, which are in plane with the surrounding background,
the metal lathing and building paper shall be extended in one width across the face of the column
or beam or similar construction not less than 125 mm beyond each side. Each edge shall be fixed
at approx. 300 mm centres.
3 03 08
Movement Joints
Movement joints shall be installed at locations indicated, and if not indicated, at spacings and
locations required by referenced standards and where a joint occurs in the background.
Movement joints shall be formed through the whole thickness of plaster or render by using
prefabricated joint profiles.
3 03 09
Cement based plaster or rendering to receive wall tiling shall be one-coat work with a thickness
of 13 mm or two-coat work with an overall thickness of 25 mm.
In case of two-coat work, the first coat shall be scratched to provide a key for the second.
For surfaces where tiles are to be fixed with adhesive, the surface shall be wood float finished
unless otherwise indicated or required by the adhesive manufacturer.
3 03 10
Tolerances
Application of plaster and rendering to solid backgrounds shall produce a flat surface, which does
not deviate by more than 3 mm in any consecutive 1800 mm when a straight edge is placed
against it.
3 03 11
Plaster and rendering shall be repaired, cut, patched, pointed up as necessary to accommodate
other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections.
Blisters, buckles, excessive crazing, dry outs, efflorescence, and similar defects shall be repaired
or replaced.
Plastered and rendered areas where the bond to the background has failed shall be replaced.
3 07 Protection
Adequate conditions shall be maintained to ensure that plaster work remains without damage or
deterioration. In particular, adequate ventilation shall be maintained in all interior areas with little
or no natural air movement.
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
4 02 Units of Measurement
Work measured by area (m2) will be classified as follows:
- Walls and columns
- Soffits, ceilings including sloping ceilings
- Sides and soffits of beams
Plaster beads will be measured by length (m) separate for each type.
Metal lath will be measured by area (m2)
Covings, cornices and similar decorative items will be measured by length (m)
16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Tables
6 01 01
2,36 mm
10
1,18 mm
60
75
40
30
0,60 mm
95
45
95
65
65
30
0,30 mm
98
75
98
75
95
65
0,15 mm
100
85
100
90
100
90
100
95
6 01 03
Max.% Min.%
4,75 mm
0,015 mm
6 01 02
Percentage by
5,00 mm
100
2,36 mm
90 100
1,18 mm
70 100
0,60 mm
40 - 80
0,30 mm
5 - 40
0,15 mm
0 - 10
Volume
Max.% Min.%
Weight
Max.% Min.%
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0,850 mm
0,600 mm
10
0,5
0,150 mm
100
40
100
40
0,075 mm
100
70
100
70
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 04
ASTM C 842
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Table 4: Sand for Lime-Putty Gypsum Gauged Sand Float Finish according to
Sieve Size
Weight
Max.%
6 01 05
Min.%
1,18 mm
0,60 mm
50
20
0,30 mm
70
50
0,15 mm
100
80
6 01 06
4,75 mm
2,36 mm
10
1,18 mm
40
10
0,60 mm
65
30
0,30 mm
90
70
0,15 mm
100
95
6 01 07
4,75 mm
2,36 mm
1,18 mm
40
10
0,60 mm
65
30
0,30 mm
90
70
0,15 mm
100
95
100
2,36 mm
90 100
19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 08
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
1,18 mm
70 100
0,60 mm
40 - 80
0,30 mm
5 - 40
0,15 mm
0 - 10
6 01 09
6 01 10
Lime
1.Coat
2.Coat
1. and 2. Coat
0 to 3/4
2 1/2 to 4
3 to 5
3 to 4
3/4 to 1 1/2
2 1/2 to 4
3 to 5
2 to 3
Lime
Sand
5 to 6
8 to 9
See Table 8
6 01 11
Lime
Sand
1/4
20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 12
C 926
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
Table 12: Finish Coat Cement Based Plaster Mixes in Compliance with ASTM
Cementious Materials
Portland Cement
Aggregate
Lime
Sand
Perlite*
3/4 to 1 1/2
1 1/2 to 2
2 1/2
6 01 13
Lime
Sand
1/4
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
* Using a plasticizer
6 01 14
Table 14: Finish Coat Rendering Mixes in Compliance with ASTM C 926.
Cementious Materials
Portland Cement
Aggregate
Lime
Sand
Perlite*
See Table 12
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 15
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Lime
Sand
1/4
1/2
4 to 4 1/2
5 to 6
8 to 9
10 to 12
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
* Using a plasticizer
6 01 16
Table 16: Aggregate Proportions for Gypsum Base Coat Plaster complying
with ASTM C 28
Aggregates by Volume
Plaster Base
Sand
Perlite or Vermiculite
2 1/2
Three-Coat Work
Scratch Coat
Brown Coat
2 1/2
Scratch Coat
Brown Coat
2 1/2
Or
Scratch and Brown Coats
Or
Scratch and Brown Coat
23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 17
ODAC
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Background
Overall Thickness
13 mm exclusive keys or
dubbing out.
10 mm
Solid
19 mm exclusive keys or
dubbing out
5 - 10 mm
As recommended by the
manufacturer
As recommended by the
manufacturer
Metal lathing
13 mm from face of
lathing
24
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and installation
of gypsum plasterboard and the relevant metal support systems.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0 Dry-Lining
02.0 Dry-wall Partition
03.0 Suspended Ceiling
1 01 04
Related Sections
07250 Fireproofing
1 02
References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 476 BS 476 - 6: 89
BS 476 - 7: 87(93)
1 02 01 07
1 02 03
German Standards
DIN 1168 - 1: 86
DIN 18180: 89
DIN 18181: 90
DIN 18183: 88
Other References
UL 263
ASTM A 853
ASTM C 36
ASTM C 79
ASTM C 442
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
ASTM C 475
Board.
ASTM C 514
ASTM C 557
ASTM C 630
ASTM C 645
ASTM C 754
ASTM C 840
ASTM C 931
ASTM C 955
ASTM C 960
ASTM C 1002
FM QQ-N-281
GA 600(1992)
UL-05
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Dry lining - cladding of a solid wall with prefabricated boards
Dry-wall - wall consisting of a metal support system, sheathed both sides with
prefabricated boards
Edges - paper covered longitudinal sides
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
1 03 02
Abbreviations
max.
min.
NFPA
Rw
STC
UL
1 05
maximum
minimum
National Fire protection Association (US)
Sound Transmission Value (German)
Sound Transmission Class (US)
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification
section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of gypsum wallboard, gypsum tiles and metal
support system for walls and ceilings specified, including label compliance, fireratings, finishes and maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide samples for initial selection purposes for all gypsum wallboard, gypsum tiles
and metal support system for walls and ceilings.
1 05 04
1 06
Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in manufacture of gypsum plasterboards, gypsum ceiling tiles and
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
steel profiles for support systems and with a history of successful production
acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work .
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 07
1 07 01
1 07 02
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Part 2:
Products
2 01
Gypsum Plasterboard
2 01 01
2 01 02
2 01 03
2 01 04
2 02
Steel Profiles
Steel profiles for studs, runners, furring channels, main carriers (intermediate
channels) etc. shall be made of steel complying with ASTM A 525M and A 527M or
an equivalent Standard. Galvanising shall be G90 (275g/m2).
2 03
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
Execution
3 01
General Examination
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that
installation work, such as electrical, heating, ventilating and plumbing work, which has
to be carried out before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02
General Preparation
Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with requirements in
specifications and schedules.
3 03
Installation
3 03 01
Dry Lining
Independent dry lining is used where space is needed for installation of ducts,
pipework etc., to provide shafts between the different floors. Fire rating is an important
matter for this type of installation.
For jointless surfaces use tapered gypsum wallboards. Fill joints after fixing with
specially formulated gypsum jointing compound, complying with DIN 1168 - 1, or
another suitable compound and reinforce with jointing tape. Also fill holes of screws to
receive a flat and smooth surface, ready for painting or application of wallpaper. Any
cut-outs in impregnated boards shall be sealed with elastic joint filler after installation
of pipework. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
3 03 01 01
3 03 01 02
3 03 01 03
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
3 03 02
Dry-wall
3 03 02 01
3 03 02 02
3 03 02 03
Insulation
Dry-walls shall be insulated with mineral fibre board of 40 mm thickness and minimum
density of 40 kg/m3, if not otherwise indicated in schedules.
Mineral fibre insulation boards shall be set between studs in a manner that they
cannot sag. Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 02 04
Sound Rating
Gypsum board dry-walls may have sound ratings between 25 and 50 dB (decibel),
depending on the overall thickness, single or double stud system, number of layers
and the insulation with mineral fibre mats. Use manufacturer's data for selection!
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Provide wall with sound rating indicated in schedules. Sound rating shall be tested by
an independent laboratory.
3 03 02 05
Fire Rating
Gypsum board dry-walls may have fire ratings between 30 and 120 min., depending
on the overall thickness, single or double stud system, number of layers and the
insulation with mineral fibre mats. Use manufacturer's data for selection!
Provide wall with fire rating indicated in schedules. Fire rating shall be tested by an
independent laboratory.
3 03 03
3 03 04
Suspended Ceiling
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely in
each room.
3 03 04 01
3 03 04 02
3 03 04 03
Fire Rating
Fire rated ceilings shall be tested as a system which includes steel support, gypsum
sheathing and eventually mineral wool overlay. Provide a certificate.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
3 04
3 05
3 07
Protection
Protect all works as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that it is without
damage at time of Substantial Completion.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from drawings.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
2,5 m2.
4 02
Units of Measurement
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible may be measured by m2.
Gypsum board dry lining, dry-walls, ceiling lining as well as ceiling tiles will be
measured by m2.
Gypsum board dry-walls will be measured vertically between floor and upper
substructure (slab etc.), and horizontally from wall to wall. Lining both sides of the wall
with plasterboards, whether single or double layers, will be regarded as one unit.
Provision for joints in dry lining and dry-walls where joints are existing in building
structure may be measured by linear m.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
General
Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour,
samples and mock-ups, co-ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination,
testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5 02
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of manufacture of GRG (Glass Fiber
Reinforced Gypsum) Forms.
1 01 04
Related Sections
A. Light gauge metal framing.
B. Veneer gypsum plaster.
C. Gypsum board.
D. Finishing glass fiber reinforced gypsum.
E. Miscellaneous metals.
1 05
Submittals
Samples and shop drawings to conform to Section 01300.
A. Samples submitted as required by architect.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings completely detailing prefabricated glass fiber reinforced gypsum
members, including locations, sizes and shapes of members, proposed jointing
arrangements, details of anchorages and supports, suspension systems, outlet boxes,
and other items which occur in or are affected by prefabricared gypsum members
shall be prepared at the factory by manufacturer only for those items indicated on
approved shop drawings.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of GRG needed products and support system for
walls and ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings, finishes and
maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide samples for initial selection purposes for all GRG needed products and
support system for walls and ceilings.
1 05 04
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
1 06
Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in manufacture of GRG products and steel profiles for support
systems and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 07
1 07 01
1 07 02
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
Part 2: Products
2 01
MATERIALS
2 01 01
4,192 psi
d. Tensile Strength:
1,340 psi
g. Hardness:
105
h. Flammability:
Flame Spread
Smoke Developed
ASTM E-84
i. Glass Content:
Zero
Zero
Class A
38.7%
2 02
FABRICATION
Molds to be constructed of reinforced fiberglass to produce units conforming to the
required profiles, dimensions and tolerances.
Allowable Tolerances:
Dimensional Tolerances: + 1/8"
Wall Thickness:
Nominal 3/16"
Out of Plumb:
+ 1/8"
Bowing:
L/360 Maximum
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
3 01
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
Execution
General Examination
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that
installation work, such as electrical, heating, ventilating and plumbing work, which has
to be carried out before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02
General Preparation
Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with requirements in
specifications and schedules.
3 03
Installation
3 03 01
General:
Employ only workmen experienced, skilled and trained on this type of quality erection
work.
3 03 02
Workmanship:
Install work of this section complete, straight, plumb, level, in true alignment and
securely anchored.
3 03 03
Erection:
GRG forms shall be installed per drawings, including the approved shop drawings,
and the manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction for this project.
3 03 04
3 03 04 01
3 03 05
Finishing Materials:
3 03 05 01
Fasteners:
As indicated on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's
printed recommendations.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 05 02
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
03.0 Joint Compound: Ready Mixed vinyl-type for interior use. (1) Grade: 2
separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling
depressions, and one for topping and sanding.
3 03 05 03
Miscellaneous Materials:
01.0 General: Provide auxiliary material for work of types and grades
recommended by manufacturer.
02.0 Adhesive: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
plaster.
3 03 02 06
Replacements:
3 03 02 06 01
3 04
03.0
04.0
CLEANUP
General:
Perform cleaning procedures as recommended by GRG unit manufacturer.
3 05
GUARANTEE
One year from Substantial Completion.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
4 01
General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from drawings.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions will be made for voids not exceeding
2,5 m2.
4 02
Units of Measurement
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will not be measured .
GRG walls, ceiling lining as well as ceiling tiles will be measured by m2 or number
(unit).
No provision for joints .
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09275 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum
5 01
General
Payment will be made for complete work including, but not limited to furnishing all
material, equipment, tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour,
samples and mock-ups, co-ordinating work with other trades, checking, examination,
testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting.
5 02
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09300 - Tile
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with ceramic tiling.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Ceramic tiles
02.0
Quarry tiles
03.0
Split tiles
Related Sections
05810
07100
07900
09200
09400
09450
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
ASTM C 373: 88
ASTM C 501: 84
ASTM C 920: 01
ASTM C 1027: 99
ASTM C 1028: 96
ASTM D 4068: 01
ASTM D 4397: 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 01 04 03
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
1 02 01 05
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
European Standards
EN 87: 92
EN 159: 91
EN 176: 92
EN 177: 91
EN 178: 91
EN 186: 91
EN 187: 91
EN 188: 91
British Standards
BS 747: 00
BS 1199: 76
BS 1521: 72
BS 5075: 82
Concrete Admixtures
BS 5980: 80
BS 6213: 00
German Standards
DIN 18156-2: 78
1 02 02
DIN 18156-3: 80
DIN 18156-4: 84
Codes
BS 5385-1: 95 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Internal
Ceramic Wall Tiling and Mosaics
BS 5385-2: 91 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of External
Ceramic Wall Tiling and Mosaics
BS 5385-3: 89 Code of Practice for the Design and Installation of Ceramic
Floor Tiles
BS 5385-4: 92 Code of Practice for Tiling and Mosaics in Specific Conditions
BS 8000-11: 89 Workmanship on building sites/Code of practice for wall and
floor tiling.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
ANSI
ASTM
TCA
ES
Egyptian Standards
ANSI
A 118.6
ANSI
A 136.1
ASTM A 185
ASTM C 144
ASTM D 4397
Applications
ASTM A 497-97
ASTM C 150-97a
ASTM C307-94
ASTM C308-95
ASTM C321-94
Mortars.
ASTM C531-95
ASTM C579-96
ASTM C884-92
ASTM D905-94
ASTM D2103-97
TCA
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Ceramic tile - thin slabs made from clay, silica, fluxes, colourings and other
mineral raw materials generally used as coverings for floors and walls.
Cleavage membrane - see separating layer
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Dust pressed tile - tile formed from a body reduced to powder or small grains
and shaped in moulds at high pressure. It may be glazed or unglazed.
Engrobe - clay based covering with a matte finish which can be permeable or
impermeable.
Extruded tile - tile whose body is shaped in the plastic state in an extruder
(e.g. quarry tiles), the column obtained being cut into tiles before fired. They
may be glazed or unglazed and are thicker and tougher than dust pressed
tiles, generally used for surfaces receiving heavy traffic
Floating method - the practice of setting ceramic tile in a thin cement: sand
bond coat on a floated cement: sand mortar bed that is still workable
Fully vitrified dust-pressed tile - dust pressed ceramic tile with a water
absorption (E) not exceeding 0,5%.
Glaze - a vitrified covering which is practically impermeable.
Mosaic - Small sized tiles assembled in sheets, the individual tessera (tile)
being glued either face side down to paper (paper faced mosaic), or bed side
down to synthetic mesh.
Quarry tile - extruded tile that are cut in succession from a single extruded
column, pressed or not pressed, glazed or unglazed. They are thicker and
tougher than normal tiles, generally used externally or for surfaces receiving
heavy traffic.
Separating layer - thin sheeting to separate the base from the mortar bed
(floor tiling) to prevent stress between base and mortar bed caused by
bending and deflection of the base.
Slip-resistant tile - tile having greater slip resistant characteristics due to an
abrasive admixture, abrasive particles in the surface, grooves or patterns in
the surface.
Split tile - tile formed as extruded double tiles, which are separated after firing
to obtain single tiles. They may be glazed or unglazed.
Trim units (fittings) - units of various shapes consisting of pieces such as
angle beads, corners, coves, mouldings etc., necessary to cover ends of tiled
surfaces.
Water absorption (E) - the water absorption (% by mass) measured in
accordance with EN 99 for tiles that shall comply with EN standards and in
accordance with ASTM C 373 for tiles that shall comply with ANSI 137.1
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of Section 01300 the
following shall be submitted thirty (30) days before tiling works are scheduled to
commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to be
furnished and installed under this section, including manufacturer's colour charts
showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units (fittings) available for
each type and composition of tile as indicated or required for completion of work for
initial selection purposes.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
1 05 02
Shop drawings
Accompanying the submittal, the following shall be submitted:
01.0
1 05 03
Samples
Accompanying the above submittal, samples of each item prepared on samples of
adequate size and construction, in sets showing full range of variations expected
Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturers colour charts
consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colours, textures, and
patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of
grout and accessories involving colour selection.
Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by
manufacturer and installer.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified for furnishing and installation of
Porcelain tiles.
Samples for verification purposes of following items:
1 05 04
Each type and composition of tile for each colour and texture required, at least
300mm square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each colour required.
1 06 Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for
checking and testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience in tiling work and shall have
successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be
skilled and trained.
Installers using epoxy adhesive shall have at least one (1) year of documented
experience with installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for the project.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 07 02
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Part 2: Products
2 01 Ceramic Tiles
All tiles shall be of the best commercial quality (first quality) unless otherwise
indicated.
Min. 95% of the tiles shall be free from visible defects that impair the appearance of
a major area of tiles.
Criteria for assessing the surface quality are cracks, crazing, unevenness,
depressions, holes, glaze devitrification, specks and spots, underglaze faults,
decorating faults, shading, nipped edges, and nipped corners in accordance with EN
98.
All trim units (fittings) and accessories including but not limited to skirting, interior
and exterior angles, step treads, sills, channels etc. shall be from the same source
and shall match the ceramic tiles.
2 01 01
02.0
03.0
04.0
low water absorption (< 0,5%, fully vitrified, frost resistant) and shall
comply with EN 176.
01.1
01.2
low water absorption (< 3%, vitrified) and shall comply with EN 176.
02.1
02.2
03.2
medium water absorption (>6% but <10%) and shall comply with EN
178.
04.1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
05.2
06.0
High water absorption (< 20%) and shall comply with ANSI A 137.1
(standard grade).
06.1
07.0
Surface finish: glazed (glossy, semi-glossy, matte or semimatte as approved by the Engineer).
Impervious, vitreous body, water absorption > 0,5% and < 3,0% when
measured as described in ASTM C 373 and ANSI A 137.1 (standard
grade).
07.1
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
Nominal sizes (length x width) and colour/pattern of tiles shall be as indicated or, if not
indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
2 01 03
2 01 04 01
Quarry Tiles
Special type of floor tile. Quarry tiles will be normally used in public areas with heavy
traffic and high requirements regarding abrasion properties.
Quarry tiles shall have
01.0 a low water absorption (<3 %).
01.1
02.0`
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
03.0
04.0
05.0
02.1
02.2
03.2
04.2
10 mm.
05.2
12 mm.
2 01 04 04
Split Tiles
Split tiles are a special type of extruded tiles with similar properties as quarry tiles.
However, after extrusion and firing, two connected tiles are coming out of this
process and, subsequently, have to be split to single tiles
Split tiles shall have a
01.0
02.0
03.0
01.2
medium water absorption (3% <E <6%) and shall comply with
EN 186.
02.1
02.2
medium water absorption (6% <E <10%) and shall comply with
EN 187.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
04.0
03.1
03.2
10 mm.
04.2
12 mm.
04.3
15 mm.
Nominal sizes (length x width) and colour/pattern shall be as indicated or, if not
indicated, as approved by the Engineer.
Cement
Cement for cement: sand backing mortar shall be ordinary Portland cement shall
comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
2 03 02
Sand
Sand used for cement: sand backing mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from
natural sources in accordance with BS 1199 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed for
mixing water. All containers used for storing water shall be clean and sun protected.
2 03 04
Adhesive
All adhesives shall be certified by manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
The mixing of components supplied before use shall be carried out in accordance
with the adhesive manufacturer's instruction.
2 03 04 01
Cement-based Adhesive
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 1 or 3
- DIN 18156-Part 2
2 03 04 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 2 or 4
- DIN 18156-Part 3
2 03 04 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with
one of the following standards:
- BS 5980 type 5.
- DIN 18156-Part 4.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
2 04 Admixtures
2 04 01
2 04 02
Admixtures to Adhesives
Admixtures to adhesives shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. They shall not be added to any adhesive unless approved by the
manufacturer of the adhesive.
2 04 03
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and shall be certified
as suitable for the intended use.
2 05 Grouts
Grout shall have low shrinkage and good adhesion and shall be certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
Neat cement mixed with water shall not be used as grout.
2 05 01
2 05 02
Proprietary Grouts
Any proprietary grout used shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the
intended use. All mixtures shall be in compliance with manufacturers instructions.
2 05 02 01
2 06 01
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible types of closed-cell foam polyethylene,
butyl rubber, or open or closed cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact
sealant as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene
(PTFE) tapes.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 06 02
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Sealant
Sealant material to be used shall be:
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
polyethylene film, thickness > 0,10 mm and shall comply with ASTM D
4397 or ASTM D 4068.
02.0
03.0
2 10 Accessories
2 10 01
2 10 02
Sanitary Fittings
Sanitary fittings such as towel bars, soap-, paper holders etc. shall match the tiles
and shall be from the same source as the tiles unless otherwise indicated.
Type, size, colour and pattern of sanitary fittings shall be as indicated.
2 10 03
Division Strips
Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made of:
01.0
stainless steel,
02.0
brass,
03.0
aluminium
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed, layer of adhesive or substrate
unless otherwise indicated.
2 11 Mixes
2 11 01
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be measured by
volume using suitable containers of fixed, measurable volume. Batching by shovel
will not be allowed.
When mortar is mixed by hand, it shall be done on a clean non-absorbent surface.
No water shall be added once mixing has been completed.
Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be
removed.
Admixtures shall be used when certified by the manufacturer for the intended use.
Cement: sand mixes shall comply with BS 5385 or an equivalent standard.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
2 11 02
2 11 02 01
2 11 02 02
Cement: sand Mortar Bedding bonded to Base for Floor Tiling ref. 3 03
03 03
Cement: sand-bedding mortar shall be 1:3 to 1:4 by volume. (1:3,4 to 1:4,6 by
weight)
2 11 02 03
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing tiling work.
All surfaces to receive tiling shall be plumb, level, and true with square corners.
Where falls have been incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for
correctness.
The trueness of backgrounds required for adhesive beds (thin bed method) shall be
such that when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap behind the straightedge
between points of contact does not exceed 3 mm, for backgrounds required for a
cement: sand mortar bedding any gap does not exceed 6 mm.
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be checked for surface temperature.
Backgrounds to receive cement: sand mortar backing shall have a temperature not
exceeding 38 degree C. For background to receive an adhesive backing, instructions
given by the adhesive manufacturer shall be followed.
The (tile) Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
Installation work shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
3 02 General Preparation
Before tiling commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for new concrete or
masonry to dry out. If rendering is subsequently to be applied, it shall be left for at
least further 2 weeks.
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, recessed frames, electrical
and mechanical installations, and similar items located in or behind tiled surfaces
has been completed.
Backgrounds not built accurately or having true surfaces or corners that are uneven
or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected and sufficient additional
time shall be allowed for setting and curing. If such backgrounds are of bricks,
blocks, stone, or concrete, an intermediate substrate, approved by the Engineer,
shall be applied to provide a true surface to receive tiling.
Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease,
wax, dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles shall be
removed.
All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room to
receive tiling.
3 03 Installation
The nature of the background is a prime consideration in deciding the choice of the
installation method, intermediate substrate or other additional preparatory treatment
necessary for tiling.
3 03 01
General
Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required, surfaces to
receive tiling shall be centred and balanced.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions.
Tiles shall be closely fit to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so
that plates, collars or covers overlap tile.
Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts shall be
positioned on the outer edges of surfaces and no cuts shall be smaller than half tile
size.
Wall tiles shall be laid in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension unless
otherwise indicated.
To ensure that courses of tiles are exactly horizontal, a level line shall be established
to position the starting course.
All joints shall be straight and of even width.
All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface will be true,
when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found does not exceed 3 mm and
the straightedge will not be obstructed by tiles. The max. Deviation between tiles
surfaces on any side of a joint shall not exceed 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide
and 2 mm for joints 6 mm or more wide.
Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be continuous with
structural movement joints.
Additional movement joints (control-, contraction-, and isolating joints) shall be
positioned where tile work abuts restraining surfaces such as walls, columns, door
frames, windows, pipes etc., at internal vertical corners, at changes of alignment
(wall/floor), where tiling is continuous across junctions of different backgrounds and
in large tiled areas at 3 m to 4,5 m centres (wall tiling) and where areas are to be bay
jointed (floor tiling).
Such movement joints shall be at least 5 mm wide. The minimum depth of sealant
shall be 6 mm unless tiles thinner than 6 mm are being used.
Before sealant is applied, edges of tiles shall be primed when recommended by the
sealant manufacturer.
If a cement: sand mortar backing is applied, movement joints shall be filled up with a
back-up material before being sealed. If thin adhesive bedding is applied and where
depth of joints is insufficient to accommodate a compressible back-up material, a
self-adhesive tape shall be used as bond breaker.
No greater area of mortar or adhesive shall be applied than can be worked before
setting.
3 03 02
Wall Tiling
3 03 02 01
General
Where prepared backgrounds are of plaster, render, plaster board, wood base panel
boards, fair faced finished concrete or the like, tiles may be fixed with an appropriate
thin bed adhesive provided that the trueness of the background is suitable unless
otherwise indicated.
Where backgrounds are of concrete-, clay-, calcium silicate brick/blockwork or rough
concrete, tiles may be fixed with a cement: sand mortar bedding provided that the
trueness of the background is suitable and the background has been prepared as
required.
Any surplus bedding material remaining on the surface of the tiles or in the joint
spaces shall be removed before hardening.
Unless otherwise indicated, joint widths shall be 2 mm for tiles up to 150 x 150 mm.
For larger sizes they shall no exceed 5 mm.
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
External wall tiles shall be supported on footings, foundations or other noncombustible supports.
Any fixing method used shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 02 02
3 03 02 03
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Tiles shall be fixed on the prepared background by either the floating- or buttering
method.
Floating Method
The mix shall be floated on to the background by trowelling to a thickness not
exceeding 10 mm and finished with a wooden float. The bed should be allowed to
stiffen slightly before any tiles are applied. A mix of 1 part cement and 1 part fine
sand and sufficient water shall be prepared to produce a mortar capable of being
trowelled 1-2 mm thick as bonding coat. This shall be trowelled over the backs of the
tiles before they are placed in position on the floated bed and tapped back firmly.
Buttering Method
Tiles shall be evenly buttered with mortar and tapped back firmly into position. The
resultant thickness of the mortar bed shall be not less than 6 mm and not exceed 12
mm.
Any method used by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 03
Floor Tiling
3 03 03 01
General
Where floor tiles are bonded directly to concrete floors with a thin bed adhesive
bedding, the floor shall have a steel trowel and fine broom finish.
Where floor tiles are bonded to concrete floors by cement: sand mortar bed on a
separating layers (cleavage membrane), the slab shall be steel trowel finished.
Surfaces exceeding 25 m2 shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
Where floor tiles abut to other materials, dividing strips shall separate them.
Joint width shall be at least 3 mm but not exceeding 6 mm unless otherwise
indicated. Joint width for extruded floor tile shall be between 6 mm and 10 mm
unless otherwise indicated.
Any fixing method used shall be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 03 02
3 03 03 03
17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 03 04
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
3 03 03 05
3 03 04
Grouting
Grouted joints shall be grey, white, or coloured as indicated or, if not indicated, as
approved by the Engineer.
Before grouting, all tiles shall be firmly set and all mortar and glue shall be removed
from tile faces and joints cleared of dust and debris.
A minimum of 24 hours shall be allowed for evaporation of adhesive solvents prior to
grouting unless otherwise required by the manufacturer of the adhesive.
When grouting with cement: sand site mixed grout, joints shall be wetted prior to
grouting. When using a proprietary grout, joints shall only be wetted when
recommended by the grout manufacturer.
The grout shall be applied with a grouting trowel, working back and forth over the
surface until the joints are completely filled. Surplus grout shall be removed from the
tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or sponge.
Where necessary or when recommended by the manufacturer, the grouted area
shall be protected from excessively fast drying.
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
After the grout has hardened, the tile surface shall be washed over with water and
left clean.
When tiles are fixed with epoxy adhesive, the grout shall be epoxy-based, too.
Grouting shall be performed at various locations as indicated.
3 03 05
Accessories
3 03 05 01
3 03 05 02
Sanitary Fittings
All sanitary fittings incorporated in tile work shall be evenly spaced and properly
centred with tile joints at locations and heights as indicated or, if not indicated, as
approved by the Engineer.
3 03 05 03
Division Strips
Division strips shall be installed to manufacturers instructions level and flush with
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated. They shall be installed where exposed
edges of tile flooring meet other floor finishes.
3 03 05 04
3 07 Protection
Tiling shall be scheduled as late as possible in the building programme in order to
reduce danger from damage and contamination.
During the laying operation, tiled areas should be not accessible except for the tiling
operatives.
Completed floor tiling should not be subject to traffic until the tile bed has set and the
joints grouted.
Completed wall and floor tiling shall be kept clean and free from cement, plaster, and
all materials, which may cause stain.
If sawdust is used for this purpose, this shall be done not earlier than 3 days after
grouting has been completed.
19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
When equipment has to be moved over finished surfaces, special precaution shall
be taken e.g. the use of timber planking. However, moving tackle and the protection
itself are not allowed to damage the tiled surface.
Stair finishing, nosing, and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not
exceeding 0,1 m2
.
Tiled surfaces that join into skirting coved skirting, coved beads or rounded
mouldings shall be measured from the top of those pieces.
4 02 Units of Measurement
Surfaces will be measured by m2 for each specified type, grade and surface
characteristic, for ceilings, walls and floors, including internal and external angles,
stop and return fittings.
Coves, decorative strips and angle beads will be measured by linear m.
Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends
and the like.
Stair and step treads will be measured by linear m.
Wall copings, sills and the like will be measured by linear m
.
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Tables
6 02
Figures
23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on essentially with soft soled footwear or
bare feet without scratching dirt (e.g. domestic bathrooms and bedrooms without
direct access from the outside).
Class 2
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on with soft soled or normal footwear with,
at the most, occasional small amounts of scratching dirt (e.g. rooms in living areas of
homes but with exception of kitchens, entrances and other rooms which may have a
lot of traffic).
Class 3
Floor coverings in areas that are walked on quite often with normal footwear and
small amounts of scratching dirt (e.g. halls, kitchens, entrances and other rooms,
which may have a lot of traffic).
Class 4
Floor coverings in areas that are subjected to considerable traffic with some
scratching dirt so that the conditions are the most severe for which glazed floor tiles
are suitable (e.g. entrances, work rooms, restaurants as well as other rooms in public
and private buildings).
Note: In public areas with high traffic, unglazed tiles with low water absorption should be
considered a better alternative as glazed tiles with class 4 properties.
7 01 02
10545-part 7
Abrasion stage:
Failure visible at revolutions
Abrasion class
100
150
600
750, 1500
>12000
Tiles ACC. to
EN 176
EN 177
EN 178
24
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
7 02 02
Tiles ACC. to
7 0203
EN 176
EN 177
EN 178
Tiles ACC. to
7 02 04
ODAC
Section 09300 Tile
EN 121
EN 186
EN 187
Tiles ACC. to
EN 121
EN 186
EN 187
25
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour and materials
and performing all operations in connection with terrazzo and natural stone flooring
for units no greater than 40 mm in thickness and 0,30 m2 in area and monolithic
terrazzo.
Unless otherwise indicated, all provisions in this section shall apply equally to
internal and external work.
1 01 01
1 01 04
1 02
Section Includes
01.0
02.0
Monolithic terrazzo,
03.0
Related Sections
02500
05810
07100
Waterproofing
07900
Joint Sealers
09300
Tile
09450
Stone Facing
References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
ASTM C 97:
ASTM C 99:
ASTM C 119:
ASTM C 170:
90Standard Test
Dimension Stone
ASTM C 171:
ASTM C 241:
ASTM C 503:
Method
for
Compressive
Strength
of
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
1 02 02
1 02 03
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
ASTM C 568:
ASTM C 615:
ASTM C 616:
ASTM C 880:
ASTM C 1028:
ASTM D 4068:
ASTM D 4397:
for
British Standards
BS 747:
BS 882:
BS 1199:
BS 1278:
BS 1521:
BS 4131:
73 Terrazzo tiles
BS 5075:
82Concrete Admixtures
BS 5980:
BS 6213:
BS 8204-4:
German Standards
DIN 4226:
DIN 18500:
91 Cast stone
DIN 18156 - 2:
DIN 18156 - 3:
DIN 18156 - 4:
Codes
BS 5385-5:
BS 8000-11:
Other References
Design Manual IV as published by the Marble Institute of America (MIA)
33505 State Street, Farmington, Michigan 48335
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
1 03
1 03 01
Definitions
Technical Terms
Abrasive Hardness (Ha) - value for abrasion resistance. Refers to the wearing
qualities of stone for floors, stair treads and other areas subjected to abrasion by foot
traffic. (see ASTM C 241)
Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
Bush-hammered - a mechanical process which produces textured surfaces.
Textures vary from subtle to rough.
Dimension stone - natural stone that has been selected, trimmed, or cut to
specified or indicated shapes or sizes, with or without one or more mechanically
dressed surfaces.
Eggshell finish - kind of (egg) surface that gives a finish that is neither glossy nor
mat
Fine rubbed - a smooth natural stone finish free from scratches without gloss.
Flamed - see thermal finish.
Granite - a visibly granular, igneous rock generally ranging in colour from pink to
light or dark grey and consisting mostly of quartz and feldspars, accompanied by one
or more dark minerals. The texture is typically homogeneous but may be gneissic or
porphyritic. Some dark granular igneous rocks, though not properly granite, are
included in the definition.
Gritted - grinding a surface with grit stones.
Grout - a thin mortar to fill the joints
Honed - a satin smooth surface of natural stone with little or no gloss.
Limestone - a rock of sedimentary origin composed principally of calcium carbonate
(the mineral calcite), or the double carbonate of calcium and magnesium (the
mineral dolomite), or some combination of these two minerals. Recrystalled
limestone, compact microcrystalline limestone, and travertine that are capable of
taking a polish are included in the category of marble.
Marble - carbonate rock that has acquired a distinctive crystalline texture by
recrystallization, most commonly by heat and pressure during metamorphism, and is
composed principally of the carbonate minerals calcite and dolomite, singly or in
combination.
Marble chips - marble granules screened to various sizes.
Monolithic terrazzo (thin bed terrazzo) - cementitious terrazzo topping poured on a
cementitious base.
Polished - the finest and smoothest glossy finish on natural stone. Generally only
possible on hard, dense material such as granite and marble.
Precast terrazzo - terrazzo fabricated in moulds and finished in shop or factory (e.g.
treads and risers), by compression or vibration.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Rustic terrazzo - a surface variation where in lieu of grinding and polishing, the
surface is washed with water or otherwise treated to expose the natural stone
chipping.
Sandstone - sedimentary rock composed mostly of mineral and rock fragments
within the sand size range (2 to 0,06 mm) and having a minimum of 60% free silica,
cemented or bonded to a greater or lesser degree by various materials including
silica, iron oxides, carbonates, or clay, and which fractures around (not through) the
constituent grains.
Sawn - a natural stone finish with a surface left as the stone comes from the gang
saw.
Terrazzo - derived from the Italian "Terrace" and Terrazzo". Terrazzo consists of
marble, granite, or if agreed with the purchaser of other natural stone chipping
embedded in cement mortar and cured ground and polished to expose the
aggregate and provide a smooth hard finish. Typically used as a finish for floors
either as precast tiles or poured in place.
Thermal finish - a surface treatment applied by intensive heat flaming.
Travertine - a variety of crystalline or microcrystalline limestone distinguished by
layered structure. Pores and cavities commonly are concentrated in some of the
layers, giving rise to an open texture. Travertine that is capable to take a polish will
be defined as marble.
Wear - the removal of material or impairment of surface finish through friction or
impact.
.
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 05
Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract and provisions of Section 01300 the
following shall be submitted thirty (30) days before terrazzo and natural stone
flooring is scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to be
furnished and installed under this section including manufacturer's colour charts
showing full range of colours, textures, pattern, and trim units (fittings) available for
each type and composition of tile as indicated for initial selection purposes.
1 05 02
Shopdrawings
The following shall be submitted:
01.0 Shopdrawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections of units, arrangements and
provisions for jointing, and other details showing relationship with, and attachment to
related work.
1 05 03
Samples
Samples of each item, prepared on samples of adequate size and construction, in
sets showing full range of variations expected.
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 05 04
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
1 06
Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor or
supplier if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractors work schedule for
checking and testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience in tiling work and shall have
successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be
skilled and trained.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 07
1 07 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Sensitive Material (e.g. adhesive, grout, sealant etc.) shall be labelled with date of
manufacture, service life, instructions for proper storage and use, and any necessary
precaution related to toxicity and flammability.
1 07 02
Part 2: Products
2 01
Terrazzo
2 01 01
Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be made from aggregate and cement with two-part mixes (one
for base layer and one for facing layer) and shall be hydraulically pressed before
curing. Marble powder may be added if appropriate.
The edges of the tile shall be perpendicular to the surface. The planes of the upper
and lower surfaces shall be parallel and adjacent vertical edges of square tiles shall
be at right angle to each other. All arises shall be sharp and true.
The minimum transverse (flexural) strength shall be 3 N/mm2 and the total water
absorption shall not exceed 8%. The water absorption of the tile-face shall not
exceed 0,4 g/cm2 when sampled and tested in compliance with BS 4131.
The maximum dimensional deviation shall be 3 mm in length and width and 6 mm in
thickness. However, for each shipment of tiles the tolerances shall not exceed 1 mm
for length and width and 3 mm for thickness.
Aggregate for base layer shall consist of naturally occurring materials such as
crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, natural sand or crushed gravel sand
and shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 882, ASTM C 33, DIN 4226.
The nominal tile sizes shall be as indicated.
2 01 01 01
Facing Layer
The facing layer shall be formed as an integral part of the tile and shall be not less
than 6 mm after grinding and shall be free from projections, depressions, flakes and
crazes.
Cement for the facing layer shall be gray, white or tinted Portland cement shall
comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN 1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
If pigments are used they shall comply with requirements of BS 1014 or shall be
certified otherwise as suitable for the intended use.
01.0 Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded marble chipping of adequate
hardness, angular in shape as distinct from elongated and flaky,
01.1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 02
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
01.2
01.3
01.4
01.5
02.0
Aggregate for facing layer shall be graded natural stone chipping similar
to characteristics of marble in compliance with manufacturers
representative sample tile(s):
02.1
02.2
02.3
Precast Terrazzo
Shall comply with requirements of ref. 2 01 01 Terrazzo Tiles.
Shapes and dimensions shall be as indicated.
All stair treads shall be provided with at least two (2) shop-fabricated abrasive insert
strips of aluminium oxide, silicone carbide (Carborundum) or solid rubber unless
otherwise indicated.
2 02
Natural Stone
All natural stone shall be free of spalls, cracks, open seams and other imperfections
that would impair its strength, durability, or appearance and free of minerals that may
cause objectionable staining under normal conditions.
Any piece of natural stone showing minor flaws or imperfections shall be referred to
the Engineer to decide whether it will be rejected, or allowed for patching or
redressing.
Chips at the edges or corners may be patched when approved by the Engineer and
provided the structural integrity of the stone is not affected and provided the patch
matches the colour and finish of the natural stone so that the patch does not detract
from the appearance.
2 02 01
Marble
2 02 01 01
General
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following physical
properties:
Absorption by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97) 0,20 (exterior use) 0,70 (interior
use)
Density, min. kg/m3 (ASTM C 97)
2595 (Calcite)
2800 (Dolomite)
2690 (Serpentine)
2305 (Travertine)
Compressive strength, min.MPa (ASTM C 170)
52
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99)
7
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (ASTM C 241)
10
Flexural strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 880)
7
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 02 01 02
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
imported marble,
02.0
03.0
03.1
polished,
03.2
eggshell,
03.3
honed,
03.4
gritted,
04.0
2 02 02
Granite
2 02 02 01
General
Granite shall have the following physical properties:
Absorption by weight, max. % (ASTM C 97)
0,40
Density, min. Kg/m3 (ASTM C 97)
2560
Compressive strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 170)
131
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99)
10,34
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha (ASTM C 241)not established
Flexural strength, min. MPa (ASTM C 880)
not established
2 02 02 02
imported granite,
02.0
03.0
03.1
polished,
03.2
eggshell,
03.3
honed,
03.4
fine axed,
03.5
fine rubbed,
03.6
bush hammered,
04.0
2 02 03 01
General
Limestone shall have the following physical properties:
Absorption by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97)
12
7,
3
(low-density)
(medium-density)
(high-density)
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
(medium-density)
2560
(high-density)
Compressive strength, min.Mpa (ASTM C 170)
12
28
(medium-density)
55
Modulus of rupture, min.MPa (ASTM C 99)
3,4
(high-density)
2,9
(low-density)
(medium-density)
6,9
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha
2 02 03 02
(low-density)
10
(high-density)
10
(low-density)
(ASTM C 241)
(medium-density)
10
(high-density)
imported limestone,
02.0
03.0
low-density,
04.0
medium-density,
05.0
high-density,
06.0
06.1
fine rubbed,
06.2
sawn,
07.0
2 02 04
Sandstone (quartz-based)
2 02 04 01
General
Sandstone shall have the following physical properties:
Abrasion by weight, max.% (ASTM C 97)
3
20
(Sandstone)
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
1
Density, min. Kg/m3 (ASTM C 97 )
2400
(Quartzite)
2160 (Sandstone)
(Quartzitic-Sandstone)
2560
(Quartzite)
Modulus of rupture, min. MPa (ASTM C 99) 2,1
(Sandstone)
6,9
(Quartzitic-Sandstone)
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
13,9
Abrasion resistance, min. Hardness Ha
2 02 04 02
(Quartzite)
8
(Sandstone)
(ASTM C 241)
(Quartzitic-Sandstone)
(Quartzite)
imported sandstone,
02.0
03.0
03.1
fine rubbed,
03.2
sawn,
04.0
2 03
2 03 01
2 03 02
Sand
Sand used for bedding mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from natural
sources in accordance with BS 1199 or an equivalent standard.
2 03 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean drinking water. Seawater will not be allowed for
mixing water.
2 03 04
Adhesive
All adhesive shall be certified as suitable for the intended use.
2 03 04 01
Cement-based Adhesive
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 1 or 3
DIN 18156-Part 2
2 03 04 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 2 or 4
DIN 18156-Part 3
2 03 04 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with
one of the following standards:
BS 5980 type 5.
DIN 18156-Part 4.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
2 03 05
Admixtures
2 03 05 01
2 03 05 02
Admixtures to Adhesives
Admixtures to adhesives shall be used in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. They shall not be added to any adhesive unless approved by the
manufacturer of the adhesive.
2 03 06
Bonding Agents
Bonding agents shall be used in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
shall be certified as suitable for the intended use. They shall not re-emulsify.
2 04
Grout
Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be suitable for
the conditions to be met.
2 04 01
Cement:Sand Grout
See ref. 2 10 03 (Mixes)
Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve
2 04 02
01.0
white joints
02.0
Cement:Lime:Sand Grout
See ref. 2 10 03 (Mixes)
Necessary alkali-resistant pigments shall be added to achieve
01.0
white joints
02.0
2 04 03
Proprietary Grout
2 04 03 01
2 05
of
factory
mixed
cement
and
other
01.0
white joints
02.0
2 05 01
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible type of closed-cell foam, polyethylene,
butyl rubber, or open or closed-cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact
sealant as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
2 05 02
Sealant
Sealant shall be:
2 06
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
2 07
2 08
01.0
polyethylene film, thickness > 0,10 mm and shall comply with ASTM D
4397 or ASTM D 4068
02.0
03.0
2 09
2 09 01
Accessories
Trim Units (Fittings)
All trim units (fittings) shall match the tiles and shall be from the same source unless
otherwise indicated.
Type, size, colour and pattern shall be as indicated.
2 09 02
Division Strips
Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be made of:
01.0
brass
02.0
extruded aluminium
03.0
stainless steel
with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise
indicated.
Dimension of division strips shall be suitable for the intended use.
2 09 03
2 10
2 10 01
Mixes
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition
controlled.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
2 10 02
2 10 02 01
2 10 02 02
2 10 02 03
Cement:Lime:Sand Mortar
The cement: lime: sand mortar mix shall be 1:1:5 to 6 by volume.
The mortar shall be mixed to a stiff plastic consistency so that when the mortar bed
is fully compacted, free water does not come to the surface.
2 10 03
Grouting Mixes
2 10 03 01
Cement:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement: sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm, 1: 2 for
joints between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
2 10 03 02
Cement:Lime:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement: lime: stone dust or suitable sand shall be 1: 2: 6.
2 10 03 03
Proprietary Grout
Proprietary grout shall be mixed according to manufacturers written instructions.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Part 3: Execution
3 01
General Examination
All backgrounds to receive tiling shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, contamination, and any potentially deleterious material
prior to commencing floor-tiling work.
All surfaces to receive floor tiling shall be level and true. Where falls have been
incorporated in the base, they shall be examined for correctness.
Where floor tiles are to be bonded to concrete floors by a cement: sand mortar bed
on a separating layer, the concrete surface shall be steel trowel finished.
Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
The tiling Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any defects or conditions
that will prevent a satisfactory tile installation.
3 02
General Preparation
Before installation commences at least 6 weeks shall be allowed for any
cementitious base to dry out.
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before
the application of floor tiles begins i.e. installation of anchors, electrical, mechanical
and sanitary installations, and similar items located in or below tiled areas.
Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be
corrected and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing
Any laitance on the surface of the background and contamination by oil, grease wax,
dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion of the tiles or may cause staining
shall be removed.
All loose material on the surface of backgrounds shall be removed by suitable
professional tools.
The finished floor level shall be established and properly marked in each room or
area to receive tiling.
3 03
3 03 01
Installation
General
Tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated. If no special pattern is required, surfaces to
receive floor tiling shall be centred and balanced.
Tile work shall be extended into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form
a complete covering without interruptions.
Tiles shall be closely fit to piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates,
collars or covers overlap tiles.
Cuts shall only be made where no alternative is possible. Generally, cuts shall be
positioned on the outer edges of surfaces.
All joints shall be straight and of even width.
All finished areas and surfaces shall be flat, level and true. The surface shall be true,
when checked with a 2 m straightedge, any gap found shall not exceed 3 mm and
the straightedge shall not be obstructed.
No greater area of mortar or adhesive shall be applied than can be worked before
setting.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Before any fixing, colour and shade variations shall be checked. Variegated tiles
shall be thoroughly mixed.
Temperatures in tiled areas shall be maintained at 10 deg. C or more during
installation and for at least 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are
required by referenced standards or manufacturer's instructions.
Expansion joints shall be located in tiled surfaces to coincide and be continuous with
structural movement joints.
Additional movement joints shall be positioned where floor tiles abut restraining
surfaces such as walls, columns, door frames, pipes, where tiling is continuous
across of junctions of different backgrounds. In addition, surfaces exceeding 25 m2
shall be bay jointed unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 02
Terrazzo Flooring
3 03 02 02
3 03 02 02 01
The semi-dry mix shall then be spread to a thickness of about 10 - 15% thicker than
the final bed thickness and shall be partially compacted, leaving the surface true and
flat to the required level; the final bed thickness shall be at least 25 mm.
A slurry of thick, creamy consistency (cement: fine sand 1: 1) shall be applied either
to the back of each tile before placing or alternatively on the partially compacted
mortar bed.
The tiles shall then be placed and tapped into position by using professional tools
(e.g. rubber mallet) with regular and straight joints between 2 mm and 3 mm wide.
Full contact between slurried tile backs and mortar bed shall be ensured.
Any surplus bedding material, which may have risen to the surface, shall be
removed and the surface washed and tiles completely cleaned.
3 03 02 02 02
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 02 02 03
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Grouting
Grouting shall not start until the mortar bed has set.
Joints shall be grouted with white or grey cement as indicated. Pigments shall not
exceed 5% by mass.
Joints shall be completely filled by squeegee until settlement ceases.
Excess grout shall be removed leaving filled joints flush with the tile surface.
After grouting, terrazzo tiles shall be thoroughly washed with clean water.
3 03 02 02 04
Grinding
Grinding and polishing shall commence after the grouted joints are thoroughly
hardened but no sooner than 3 days after grouting.
The tiled surface shall be mechanically ground to remove surplus grout and to
correct any unevenness between adjacent tiles.
All grinding residues and dust shall be washed off and voids shall be filled with
similar grout.
After 24 hours, the surface shall be re-ground.
Finally, the surface shall be wet polished to receive
01.0
02.0
3 03 03
3 03 03 01
3 03 03 01 01
3 03 03 01 02
3 03 03 02
3 03 03 02 01
3 03 03 02 02
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
Within a period of 30 min. before placing the mortar bed, a thin layer of neat cement
slurry shall be spread on the concrete surface and brushed to a thin uniform coating.
The stiff, plastic mortar bed shall be applied immediately over the thin cement
coating between wooden fillets while the slurry is still wet and shall be levelled,
tamped and fully compacted. A slurry of neat cement and water or a cement-based
adhesive
shall
be
applied
to
the
back
of
the
tiles.
Alternatively, the levelled mortar bed shall be dusted with a thin dry cement layer
sprinkled with a fine sieve and lightly trowelled assuring that the cement becomes
dampen.
3 03 03 03
3 03 03 03 01
3 03 03 03 02
3 03 03 04
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
01.1
01.2
01.3
02.0
02.1
02.2
Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from the tile face as work proceeds. Sawdust shall
not be used to clean off grout.
3 03 05
3 03 07
Accessories
3 03 07 02
Division Strips
Division strips shall be installed to manufacturers instructions level and flush with
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3 05
3 05 01
3 05 02
Natural Stone
Cleaning of natural stone shall be carried out after setting, pointing, grouting and
curing has been finished.
Cleaning shall be in compliance with recommended procedures of the natural stone
manufacturer. Cleaning agents shall only be used when recommended by the
manufacturer as suitable for the intended use.
After final cleaning a (impregnating and hardening) sealant shall be applied in
compliance with sealant manufacturers instructions.
3 07
Protection
Areas to receive terrazzo or a natural stone finish shall be scheduled as late as
possible in the building program in order to reduce danger from damage and
contamination.
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
During the laying operation, tiled areas shall not be accessible except for the tiling
operatives.
Completed tiling shall not be subject to traffic for at least seven (7) days unless
otherwise recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
For general protection, the completed areas shall be covered by a heavy
Polyethylene sheeting of type that will not stain or discolour the finished surface.
When equipment or other heavy loads has to be removed over finished surfaces,
special precaution shall be taken e.g. use of timber planking. However, moving
tackle and the protection itself shall not damage the finished surface.
Stair finishing, nosing and other vulnerable constructions shall be protected by
temporary casings.
Maintenance Manual
a)
b)
4 02
Durability
The Contractor shall ensure that the performance criteria are satisfied for the design life of the
materials, as stated by the Specification provided always that the maintenance has been
carried out as specified by the Contractor.
4 03
Cleaning
The Contractor shall state the frequency and method of cleaning required to maintain
performance. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the maximum time during which
the performance can be maintained together with the frequency and method of cleaning
required to achieve this. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials stipulated for
cleaning have no detrimental effect on the Terrazzo, or on adjacent materials.
19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings.
Work will be measured on the exposed surface
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for voids not
exceeding 0,1 m2
5 02
Units of Measurement
Surfaces will be measured by m2 for each specified type, grade and surface
characteristic.
Coves, decorative strips etc. will be enumerated.
Floor channels will be measured by linear m including outlets, corners, stop ends
and the like.
Stair treads and risers will be measured by linear m for each specified type, grade
and surface characteristic.
Separation layers will be measured by m2. No allowance will be made for
measurement of overlapping joints. No deductions will be made for void not
exceeding 0,50 m2.
20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09400 Terrazzo and Natural Stone Flooring
General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material, equipment,
tools, scaffolding, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, mixing, samples,
checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning the site and including but
not limited to the following ancillary works.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at
contractors expense.
No payment will be made for unauthorised operations.
Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be
removed and replaced on Contractors expense.
6 02
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with non-load bearing vertical
natural stone facing of thickness not exceeding 75 mm including soffits and sloped
vertical surfaces.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
02.0
Related Sections
05810
07150
07200
07900
09300
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
ASTM B 221M: 00
ASTM C 97: 96
ASTM C 99: 87
ASTM C 119: 01
ASTM C 144: 99
ASTM C 170: 90
ASTM C 241: 90
ASTM C 270: 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 01 04 03
ANSI A 136.1: 92
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
ASTM C 503: 99
ASTM C 568: 99
ASTM C 615: 99
ASTM C 616: 99
ASTM C 880: 98
ASTM C 920: 01
ASTM F 593: 98
ASTM F 594: 98
ASTM F 738M: 01
ASTM F 836M: 01
British Standards
BS 1199: 76
BS 5980: 97
BS 6105: 81
BS 6213: 00
BS 10095: 99
German Standards
DIN 18156-2: 78
DIN 18156-3: 80
DIN 18156-4: 84
DIN 18515-1: 98
DIN 18516-3: 99
DIN-EN 1469: 94
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 02
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
DIN-EN 12057: 96
DIN-EN 12059: 96
DIN-EN 12372: 99
DIN-EN 12407: 00
DIN-EN 12440: 01
DIN-EN 12670: 02
Codes
BS 6093: 93
BS 6270
BS 6270-1: 82
BS 8000-11: 95
BS 8298: 94
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Abrasive hardness - refers to the wearing qualities of natural stone subjected to
abrasion by foot traffic.
Arris - the corner or angle formed by the meeting of two surfaces, especially in
mouldings; it can be moulded, unfinished, bevelled, rounded or otherwise shaped.
Axed finish - see bush hammered.
Bush-hammered - a mechanical process which produces textured surfaces.
Textures vary from subtle to rough.
Cavity vent - an opening in filled joints of stone cladding to allow the passage of air
and moisture from inside the wall cavity to the exterior. These vents may be
openings, plastic tubing or wicks.
Cladding - external vertical non-load bearing covering to a structure.
Chamfer - to cut away the edges where two surfaces meet in an external angle,
leaving a bevelled joint at the junction.
Dimension stone - natural stone that has been selected, trimmed, or cut to
specified or indicated shapes or sizes, with or without one or more mechanically
dressed surfaces.
Eggshell finishes - kind of (egg) surface that gives a finish that is neither glossy nor
mat.
Fine rubbed - a smooth natural stone finish free from scratches without gloss.
Finish - final surface applied to the face of a natural stone during fabrication.
Fixing - anchor device to support or tie back a stone facing panel/unit.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Stone facing - natural stone wall covering with a final surface finish applied as an
exterior or interior vertical surface, thickness of stone not exceeding 75 mm.
Thermal finish - a surface treatment applied by intensive heat flaming.
Tile - a unit of natural stone having a facial area of not more than 0,30 m2 and a
thickness not exceeding 12 mm.
Travertine - a variety of crystalline or microcrystalline limestone distinguished by
layered structure. Pores and cavities commonly are concentrated in some of the
layers, giving rise to an open texture. Travertine that is capable to take a polish will
be defined as marble.
Vein - (1) a sheet-like body of minerals in marble . (2) A layer seams or narrows
irregular body of mineral material different from the surrounding formation.
Vein cut - cutting of a quarried stone block perpendicular to the natural bedding.
Weathering - natural alteration by either chemical or mechanical processes due to
the action of constituents of the atmosphere, surface water, or to temperature
change.
Weep holes - see cavity vent.
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 04 System Description
1 04 01 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
-restrained fixings
-combined load bearing and restraint fixings
-face fixings
Typical load bearing, restrained, face and soffit fixings are shown in fig.3-8/Annex 6.
In case the Contract Documents require insulation behind the stone facing in principle,
such insulation shall be
- non-combustible or of limited flame spread as required by applicable building
code regulations.
- non-absorbent
- rot and vermin proof
Design of ventilated vertical stone facings shall comply with BS 8298 or appropriate MIA
requirements unless otherwise indicated.
1 05 Submittals
1 05 01
Product Data
To be submitted for each variety of stone, indicating the petrographic description,
commercial name, and country of origin and physical properties.
Manufacturers catalogues and technical information on all types of fixings, all
accessories, and other manufactured products intended to use within the Project.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Submit sets of shop drawings, showing general layout, jointing, anchoring, movement
joints, and all other information necessary for fabrication and installation, including
dimension of each panel/unit of natural stone and its identification (setting) number.
1 05 03
Samples
For each variety of stone showing the full range of variations expected in completed
work, in sets of samples of not less than 300 mm2 .
Anchors and other fixings in sets of samples.
For each colour of grout not less than one square meter samples.
Approval of samples does not constitute approval of final work.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e.
indicating day, month, year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor, natural
stone manufacturer, or supplier.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than
three (3) days after checking and testing.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure
traceability.
Arrangements shall be made and time allowed in Contractors work schedule for
checking and testing as indicated.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 06 01
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced Standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience in natural stone facing work and shall have
successfully completed work similar in design, material, and extent to that work indicated
for the Project.
Installers shall be familiar with all materials and installation procedures and shall be
skilled and trained.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 06 04 02
1 06 04 03
1 07 02
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Part 2: Products
2 01 Natural Stone
2 01 01
General
All natural stone shall be free of spalls, cracks, open seams and other imperfections that
would impair its strength, durability, or appearance and free of minerals that may cause
objectionable staining under normal conditions.
Any piece of natural stone showing minor flaws or imperfections shall be referred to the
Engineer to decide whether it will be rejected, or allowed for patching or redressing.
Chips at the edges or corners may be patched when approved by the Engineer and
provided the structural integrity of the stone is not affected and provided the patch
matches the colour and finish of the natural stone.
Obtain each variety of natural stone from a single quarry.
Obtain each type of grout, accessory, sealant and other material from a single
manufacturer unless approved otherwise.
2 01 02
Marble
2 01 02 01
General
01.0
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following
physical properties in compliance with ASTM C 503:
2595 (Calcite)
2800 (Dolomite)
2690 (Serpentine)
2305 (Travertine)
52
10
02.0
Marble shall be capable of taking a polish and shall have the following
physical properties:
2 01 02 02
min.2600
10
02.0
03.0
Cut:
03.1
fleuri cut,
03.2
vein cut,
04.0
final surface:
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
04.1
rough finish,
04.2
smooth finish,
04.3
polished finish,
05.0
colour:
05.1
as indicated.
06.0
07.0
imported.
08.0
Cut:
08.1
fleuri cut,
08.2
vein cut,
09.0
09.1
polished.
09.2
eggshell.
09.3
honed.
09.4
gritted.
2 01 03
Granite
2 01 03 01
General
01.0
Granite shall have the following physical properties in compliance with
ASTM C 615:
2 01 03 02
0,40
2560
131
10,34
not established
not established
imported or local
03.0
Cut:
03.1
fleuri cut,
03.2
vein cut,
04.0
04.1
polished.
04.2
eggshell.
04.3
honed.
04.4
fine axed.
04.5
fine rubbed.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
04.6
bush hammered.
2 01 04
Limestone
2 01 04 01
General
01.0
Limestone shall have the following physical properties in compliance
with ASTM C 568:
-Moisture absorpt. by weight, max.%
(Test: ASTM C 97)
2 01 04 02
12
(low-density)
7,5
(medium-density)
(high-density)
1760
(low-density)
2160
(medium-density)
2560
(high-density)
12
(low-density)
28
(medium-density)
55
(high-density)
2,9
(low-density)
3,4
(medium-density)
6,9
(high-density)
10
(low-density)
10
(medium-density)
10
(high-density)
02.0
imported
03.0
04.0
low-density,
05.0
medium-density,
06.0
high-density,
07.0
Cut:
07.1
fleuri cut,
07.2
vein cut,
08.0
08.1
fine rubbed.
08.2
sawn.
2 01 05
Sandstone (quartz-based)
2 01 05 01
General
01.0
Sandstone shall have the following physical properties in compliance
with ASTM C 616:
-Moisture absorpt. by weight, max.%
20
(Sandstone)
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
2 01 05 02
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
(Quartzite)
2160
(Sandstone)
2400
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
2560
(Quartzite)
2,1
(Sandstone)
6,9
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
13,9
(Quartzite)
(Sandstone)
38
(Quartzite-Sandstone)
(Quartzite)
01.0
Subject to requirements as indicated for sandstone, sandstone panels/units/tiles shall
be of type indicated below, nominal sizes as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated:
01.0
imported sandstone,
02.0
local sandstone,
03.0
04.0
05.0
Cut:
05.1
fleuri cut,
05.2
vein cut,
06.0
06.1
fine rubbed.
06.2
sawn.
2 02 Fixing Materials
2 02 01
2 02 01 01
Cement
Cement used shall be Ordinary Portland cement and shall comply with ISO 680: 90, DIN
1164-1: 94 and DIN 1164-2: 96.
2 02 01 02
Sand
Sand used for mortar shall be a building sand (0-3 mm) from natural sources in
accordance with BS 1199, ASTM C 144, or an equivalent standard.
2 02 01 03
Water
Water shall be fresh and clean potable water.
2 02 01 04
Admixtures
Admixtures shall not contain calcium chloride (BS 8298/page 9) and shall be certified by
the manufacturer as appropriate for the intended use.
2 02 02
Adhesives
All adhesives shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the application
indicated.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 02 02 01
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Cement-based Adhesive
Cement-based adhesive shall comply with one of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 1 or 3
DIN 18156-Part 2
2 02 02 02
Organic Adhesive
Organic adhesive shall comply with one of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 2 or 4
ANSI A 136.1
DIN 18156-Part 3
2 02 02 03
Epoxy Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive shall be water cleanable prior to initial setting and shall comply with one
of the following Standards:
BS 5980 type 5.
DIN 18156-Part 4.
2 02 03
Fixing Devices
All fixing devices shall be engineered individually for each Project and shall be made of
stainless steel, bronze, brass, or extruded aluminium. Steel fixings for interior stone
facing may be made corrosion resistant by hot-dip galvanising.
All fixing devices shall be non-staining to prevent possible staining of the face of the
cladding due to corrosion. (BS 8298 /page 12)
Stainless steel fixings shall be made of austenitic stainless steel with a carbon content not
exceeding 0,06% and shall comply with BS 1149-2, BS 970-1, BS 6105, ASTM A 666
(type 304) or equivalent.
Fixing devices made from extruded aluminium shall comply with ASTM B 221 or
equivalent. Alloy and temper shall be as necessary to support all loads imposed without
exceeding allowable design stresses, but not less than strength properties of alloy 6063T6.
Site welding and brazing of stainless steel, aluminium, copper and copper based alloy
fixings will only be permitted where the necessary facilities, expert knowledge, skill and
inspection and testing facilities are available.
2 02 04
Wire
Wire tiebacks shall be made of stainless steel, copper or copper alloy, minimum
thickness 3 mm.
2 03
Grout
Grout shall have low shrinkage and appropriate adhesion and shall be appropriate for the
application indicated.
2 03 01
2 03 02
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
2 03 03
Proprietary Grout
2 03 03 01
2 04 Accessories
2 04 01
Joint Accessories
2 04 01 01
General
Any sealant and back-up material used shall be certified by the manufacturer as suitable
for the intended use.
Any sealant used for movement joints shall match the colour of grout in stone-faced
areas adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.
Where all joints are required to be sealed, the colour of the sealant shall match the colour
of the stone facing unless otherwise indicated.
2 04 01 02
Back-up Material
Back-up strips shall be flexible, compressible type of closed-cell foam, polyethylene, butyl
rubber, or open or closed-cell polyurethane, rounded at surface to contact sealant as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE)
tapes.
2 04 01 03
Sealant
Sealant shall be made from:
01.0
One-part polysulfide
02.0
One-part polyurethane
03.0
Two--part polysulfide
04.0
Two-part polyurethane
05.0
2 04 01 04
Shims
Shims shall be made of resilient plastic, non-staining to stone, and sized to suit joint
thickness.
2 04 02
Damp-proofing Material
See Section 07150 Damp-proofing
2 05 Fabrication
2 05 01
General
Fabricate stone facing in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, including details shown on drawings and shop drawings.
Cut stone by vein or fleuri cut as indicated to produce pieces of thickness, size, and
shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and installation tolerances. If the type of
cutting is not indicated, cutting method will be determined and approved by the Engineer.
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Cut joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Drill holes and cut mortices, sinkings, notches for cramps, anchors, and lifting devices as
indicated or needed to install stones securely in place. Use professional tools that will
ensure that cracks do not occur from the process.
Arrange panels/units in the shop or other suitable location in proposed pattern, orientation
and sequence for examination and approval by the Engineer. Rearrange panels/units as
directed by the Engineer until the layout is approved.
Do not cut and trim non-modular sized units/panels to smaller than modular sized units
until layout and pattern are approved by the Engineer
Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish
of each type of natural stone required and to match approved samples.
Identify each panel/unit clearly with its identification mark or symbol.
Fabricators workmen bush-hammering, sandblasting, or dry-grinding without vacuum
equipped features shall wear protective head and face helmets equipped with safetyglass lenses and/or respiratory equipment.
2 05 02
Fabrication Tolerances
The length and height dimensions shall not vary from nominal sizes indicated by more
than 3 mm.
The thickness of stone shall not vary from nominal thickness by more than 3 mm.
The stone faces shall not vary from the plane by more than 1,5 mm in 1200 mm.
The squareness of natural stone, measured by the length of diagonals, shall not vary by
more than 0,5% of the nominal dimension or 5 mm, whichever is less.
The given tolerances shall apply for granite and marble unless otherwise indicated but
may be increased for limestone and sandstone depending on the type of stone and the
quarry.
2 06 Mortar Mixes
2 06 01
General
Materials shall be batched by weight wherever possible and water addition controlled.
Where weight batching is impracticable, mortar ingredients shall be measured by volume
using suitable containers of fixed, measurable size.
When mortar is mixed by hand, it shall be done on a clean non-absorbent surface.
No water shall be added once mixing has been completed.
Any mortar not used within two (2) hours after adding mixing water shall be removed
Admixtures shall only be used when certified by the manufacturer as suitable for the
intended use.
2 06 02
2 06 02 01
2 06 02 02
Cement:Lime:Sand Mortar
The cement:lime: sand mortar mix shall be 1:1:5 to 6 by volume.
The mortar shall be mixed to a stiff plastic consistency so that when the mortar bed is
fully compacted, free water does not come to the surface.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 06 02 03
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
2 06 03
Grouting Mixes
2 06 03 01
Cement:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement:sand shall be 1: 1 for joints not exceeding 3 mm, 1: 2 for joints
between 3-6 mm and 1: 3 for joints wider than 6 mm.
2 06 03 02
Cement:Lime:Sand Grout
The proportions of cement:lime:stone dust or suitable sand shall be 1: 2: 6.
2 06 03 03
Proprietary Grout
Proprietary grout shall be mixed according to manufacturers written instructions.
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
All surfaces to receive stone facing shall be inspected for structural soundness, for
existing surface conditions, for installation tolerances and any other conditions affecting
the work.
For the record, all conditions found detrimental to requirements and not allowing a proper
installation of stone facing, shall be listed in a written report issued by the installer and
handed over to the Engineer.
Installation works shall not proceed until satisfactory conditions are provided.
3 02 General Preparation
Provisions shall be made for the completion of all subsidiary works necessary before the
application of stone facing begins.
Bases not built accurately or surface conditions that are not suitable shall be corrected
and additional time shall be allowed for setting and curing.
For surfaces receiving adhesive or thin-bed mortar fixing, any laitance on the surface
and contamination by oil, grease wax, dust or any other substances that inhibits adhesion
or may cause staining of stone shall be removed.
Clean natural stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fibre brushes and then drenching with
clear water immediately before fixing. Use only cleaning compounds that contain no
staining or harsh components or abrasives.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Erect/install stone facing units/panels level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths in
compliance with drawings and shop drawings.
Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. Unless joints are designed to be left open,
remove shims before grouting or pointing.
Fix stone to comply with layout and pattern as indicated. If no special layout or pattern is
required, surfaces shall be arranged in blend pattern, stones centred and balanced.
Expansion joints shall be located to coincide and be continuous with structural expansion
joints. Other movement joints in the stone facing shall be as indicated.
Unless proved by structural analysis or performance testing otherwise, minimum
thickness of stone facing shall comply with table 1/Annex 6 unless otherwise indicated.
Anchor and fixing devices for stone facing shall be designed to withstand dead loads
together with wind pressure and suction.
The suitability of fixings of unusual design and position shall be proven by test.
Mechanical fixings shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:
-self support anchors (load bearing fixings)
-restraint fixings
-combined load bearing and restraint fixings
-face fixings
Typical fixings are shown in fig. 3-8/Annex 6
Fixing of natural stone by means of adhesive will be allowed only for thin stone tiles not
exceeding 12 mm in thickness and surfaces not exceeding 2,50 m in height.
16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 02
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
3 03 02 01
01.0
01.1
01.2
01.3
01.4
01.5
01.6
End match panels/units/tiles stacked one above the other if no units are
directly adjacent.
01.7
01.8
3 03 02 01 01 Installation
01.0
Natural stone panels/units shall be set firmly against (cement) mortar spots
(spacer dabs) located at or near the restraining fixings and spaced not more than 50 cm
apart over the back of the panel/unit. If restraining fixing devices fit into grooves routed
into stone facing panels/units, setting mortar spots are not required.
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions placed at least a joint
width back from stone face in case non-load-bearing fixing devices are being used.
If the fixing devices are not self-supporting (load bearing type), support angles shall be
provided over all openings, at each storey height, or as indicated. Supporting angles shall
have weep holes at least every 60 cm.
Anchors, dowels, cramps, wires and the like shall be securely attached to the structure
and to the facing stone according to manufacturers requirements and as shown on
drawings and shop drawings.
A minimum of four anchors shall be provided for panels up to one square meter, with two
additional anchors for each additional 0,7 square meter of surface area unless otherwise
indicated.
Wire tieback systems shall be only used up to two (2) stories in height.
Cavity vents (weep holes) shall be provided in the joints at approximately 1,5 m
horizontal intervals and 6 m maximum vertical intervals unless joints are required to be
left unfilled.
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum width of mortar joints shall be 3 mm and of
elastomeric sealant joints 5 mm except for structural expansion and other movement
joints.
Installation shall be in compliance with requirements established by the Marble Institute
of America (MIA) in Design Manual IV and/or in BS 8298 unless otherwise indicated.
17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 02 01 02
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Jointing
01.0
01.1
01.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant to match the colour of the stone
facing, including joint back up.
01.3
01.4
Joints: as indicated.
02.0
Joint width shall be maintained by a mortar bed screed level and full,
but kept away back 20 mm from the joint face before the stone
unit/panel is lowered into place. All joints shall be completely filled.
Vertical joints may be filled by pouring grout into joints or rear edges of
units/panels being buttered before setting. .
To prevent any squeezing of mortar into the ventilation cavity,
performed plastic strips or tapes shall be used.
3 03 02 02
02.1
02.2
3 03 02 02 01
Installation
01.0
Where gaps in the background exceed 3 mm, local corrections by dubbing out up to 6
mm thick may be done by using the same adhesive or mortar. However, this method shall
be certified as appropriate by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
For fixing, the notched trowelling method shall be used: The adhesive or thin-bed mortar
shall be applied to the surface as a float coat with a trowel, pressing the adhesive or
mortar onto the surface to give a bed thickness not exceeding 3 mm unless otherwise
required by the manufacturer, which shall then be combed through with a notched trowel
of type recommended by the manufacturer of the adhesive or mortar.
This will give a series of ribs into which the dry natural stone tiles shall be pressed with a
twisting or sliding action to obtain maximum bonding. Average contact area shall be at
least 95% when not less than three tiles are removed for inspection.
All tiles shall be fixed in position before surface drying of the adhesive or mortar
commences.
For external surfaces, only cement-based or epoxy-resin based adhesive or thin-bed
mortar shall be used.
3 03 02 02 02
3 03 03
Jointing
01.1
01.2
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Arrange panels/units/tiles with veining and other natural markings to comply with the
following:
01.0
01.1
01.2
01.3
01.4
01.5
01.6
End match panels/units/tiles stacked one above the other if no units are
directly adjacent.
01.7
01.8
3 03 03 01
3 03 03 01 01
Installation
01.0
Joint width shall be maintained with non-staining resilient cushions placed at least a joint
width back from stone face in case non-load-bearing fixing devices are being used.
If the fixing devices are not self-supporting (load bearing type), support angles shall be
provided over all openings, at each storey height, or as indicated. Supporting angles shall
have weep holes at least every 60 cm.
Anchors, dowels, cramps, wires and the like shall be securely attached to the structure
and to the facing stone according to manufacturers requirements and as shown on
drawings and shop drawings.
A minimum of four anchors shall be provided for panels up to one square meter, with two
additional anchors for each additional 0,7 m2 of surface area unless otherwise indicated.
Wire tieback systems (restrained fixings) shall be only used up to two (2) stories in
height.
Unless otherwise indicated, minimum width of mortar joints shall be 3 mm and of
elastomeric sealant joints 5 mm except for structural expansion and other movement
joints.
Installation shall be in compliance with requirements established by the Marble Institute
of America (MIA) in Design Manual IV and/or in BS 8298 unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 03 01 02
Jointing
01.0
01.1
01.2
Joints: sealed with elastomeric sealant to match the colour of the stone
facing, including joint back-up.
01.3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 03 02
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
01.4
Joints: as indicated.
02.0
Joint width shall be maintained by a mortar bed screeded level and full,
but kept away back 20 mm from the joint face before the stone
unit/panel is lowered into place. All joints shall be completely filled.
Vertical joints may be filled by pouring grout into joints or rear edges of
units/panels being buttered before setting. .To prevent any squeezing
of mortar into the ventilation cavity, performed plastic strips or tapes
shall be used.
02.1
02.2
3 03 03 02 01
Installation
01.0
Where gaps in the background exceed 3 mm, local corrections by dubbing out up to 6
mm thick may be done by using the same adhesive or mortar. However, this method shall
be certified as appropriate by the adhesive or mortar manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
For fixing, the notched trowelling method shall be used: The adhesive or thin-bed mortar
shall be applied to the surface as a float coat with a trowel, pressing the adhesive or
mortar onto the surface to give a bed thickness not exceeding 3 mm unless otherwise
required by the manufacturer, which shall then be combed through with a notched trowel
of type recommended by the manufacturer of the adhesive or mortar.
This will give a series of ribs into which the dry natural stone tiles shall be pressed with a
twisting or sliding action to obtain maximum bonding. Average contact area shall be at
least 95% when not less than three tiles are removed for inspection.
All tiles shall be fixed in position before surface drying of the adhesive or mortar
commences.
3 03 03 02 02
3 03 04
Jointing
01.1
01.2
Installation Tolerances
01.0
02.0
02.1
3 mm in 2400 mm.
02.2
6 mm in 6000 mm.
02.3
10 mm maximum.
03.0
04.0
Variation in joint width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1,5 mm or
of joint width, whichever is less.
05.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 05
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Movement Joints
In order to prevent a build up of compressive forces, movement joints shall be as
indicated in drawings and where necessary due to the method of stone fixing.
Where stone panels/units are set in mortar bed, horizontal and vertical movement joints
shall be provided at 5,00 m maximum intervals and between 1,50 m - 3,00 m away from
any corner unless otherwise indicated.
Movement joints shall be sealed with an elastomeric sealant.
Joint width shall depend on the expected amount of movement and the maximum strain
that can be accommodated by the sealant. Joint width shall not be less than 10 mm per
5,00 m stone facing.
3 07 Protection
Surfaces to receive natural stone facing shall be scheduled as late as possible in the
building program in order to reduce danger from damage and contamination.
Vulnerable stone facings exposed to other construction works shall be protected by
temporary casings.
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
4 02 Units of Measurement
Surfaces will be measured by m2 for each specified type, grade and surface
characteristic of natural stone.
Soffits, columns, pillars and the like will be measured by m2 for each specified type,
grade, and surface characteristic of natural stone.
Structural expansion joints may be measured by linear meter (m).
22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
Stone location
G
Mw
T
Ls
K
Mb
Ls
Ss
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
20
50
30
30
NA
50
40
40
NA
75
40
30
30
40
30
30
NA
NA
NA
75
50
50
20
20
20
50
30
30
NA
50
30
40
NA
75
40
40
NA
75
SL
Q
Cladding (external )
Less than 3.7 m above ground or floor
level and continuously supported (incl.
fascias)
Fascias less than 3.7 m above ground
or floor level and continuously supported
(incl. fascias)
More than 3.7 m above ground or floor
level and continuously supported (incl.
fascias)
4)
Soffits (including inclined soffits)
Sills, copings and supported reveals
Stone faced concrete units
Lining (internal)
Less than 7 m above ground or floor
level and continuously supported (incl.
5)
fascias)
Less than 7 m but more than 3.7 m
above ground or floor level on corbels in
slots (incl. fascias)
More than 7 m above ground or floor
level (incl. fascias(
Soffits (including inclined soffits)
4)
Abbreviations
G Granites
Ls limestone (e.g. Portland, Bath, Clipsham)
LsH Hard limestones (e.g. Roman stone)
Mb Brecciated marbles
Mw Homogeneous marbles
Q Quartzites
SL States(those unlikely to delaminate
Ss Sandstones(e.g. York,Northumberland, Scottish)
NA not applicable
T Travertines
4)The figures in the table apply to soffit stones not exceeding 900 mm x 600 mm.
If stones of a greater size are required consideration should be given to using
some face fixings and/or additional fixings in the length and/or increased
thickness.
Internal soffit stone not less than 1.2 m and not more than 3.7 m above floor
level, continuously supported at reveals may be 20 mm thick for G, Q, SL, T,
Lsh, Mw, and 50 for Ls and Ss.
5)Internal cladding between 3.7 m and 7 m in height in a continuous face should
have an intermediate corbel course.
24
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
6 02 Figures
25
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
26
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
27
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
t
d
Preformed
pocket
15 deg.
1/3
2/3
28
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
29
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
30
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
31
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09450 Stone Facing
:t
:
32
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and installation
of acoustical treatment.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Acoustical Ceilings
02.0
03.0
04.0
Related Sections
04200
Unit Masonry
09200
09250
Gypsum Board
09545
15050
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
ISO 834 : 99
ISO 3575: 76
ISO 6361 -
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
ASTM C 423: 01
ASTM C 635: 00
ASTM C 636: 96
ASTM E 119: 00
1 02 01 06
1 02 01 07
British Standards
BS 6496: 84(91)
BS 6497: 84(91)
German Standards
DIN 18164 - 2: 01 Cellular plastics as insulating building materials Part 2:
Insulating materials for impact sound insulation made of
rigid expanded polystyrene foam
DIN 18165 - 2: 01 Fibrous insulating building materials; impact sound
insulating
materials
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Airborne sound - this term is applied when the mechanical vibrations are
propagated like wave motions in air or other gases
Coffered ceiling - ceiling with recessed panels
Dry lining - sheathing of a solid wall with prefabricated boards
Drywall - wall consisting of a metal or wood stud support system, sheathed both
sides with prefabricated boards
Furring channels - steel profiles running crosswise to main carriers, fixed to these
ones, onto which the plasterboard is screwed
Gypsum wallboard - building board consisting of a core encased in and firmly
bonded to paper liners with a finish suitable for painting or wallpapering
Impact sound - the mechanical vibrations travel within solid bodies, i.e. concrete,
masonry, metal etc.
Main (intermediate) carriers - row of steel profiles for suspended ceilings which is
fixed by hangers to the substructure
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Modular pan grid (beam grid) - metal pan-type suspension grid which allows drywalls to be fixed to the suspended ceiling
Runners - U-shaped steel profiles used as floor and ceiling members for drywalls;
main carriers of T-grid systems are also called runners
Sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations, which contain frequencies
within a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
Studs - C-shaped steel profiles or dimensioned lumber used as vertical members for
drywalls
1 03 02
Abbreviations
CAC
deg C
kPa
max.
min.
N/cm3
NRC
RH
UL
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of acoustical tile and panel and metal support
system for suspended ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings,
finishes and maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance
with referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for ceiling- and wall
tiles and panels and metal support system.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturer
regularly engaged in manufacture of gypsum plasterboards, gypsum ceiling tiles
and steel profiles for support systems and with a history of successful production
acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work .
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 07 02
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Products
2 01 Acoustical Ceilings
2 01 01
2 01 02
Suspension Profiles
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
2 01 03
2 01 03 01
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 03 02
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Clean Rooms
Tiles and panels shall meet the requirements for the indicated class of 'Clean
Rooms' as per definition of Federal Standard 209. They shall also meet the
requirements for sound and fire protection as indicated and be tested by an
authorised and independent laboratory.
2 01 04
2 01 04 01
2 01 04 02
01.0
02.0
03.0
02.0
03.0
2 04 01 01
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 04 01 02
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
2 04 02
02.0
03.0
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
Execution
3 01 General Examination
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that
installation work, such as electrical and plumbing work, which has to be carried out
before the Works specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with requirements in
specifications and schedules. A pre-installation meeting for co-ordination purposes
among the different trades involved shall be held.
3 03 Installation
Installation of acoustical material shall not be performed when the building is
excessively cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely
approximating the interior conditions during occupation shall be maintained during
and after installation.
3 03 01
Acoustical Ceiling
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely
in each room.
3 03 01 01
Grid System
There are generally 3 different grid systems: Concealed T-grid (special for clip-in
method), exposed T-grid and modular pan grid systems. The later uses a metal pan
grid of 75/100/125 and sometimes 150 mm width. This grid is used for fixing drywalls within the modular system to the ceilings. The exposed T-grids are available in
different variations, depending on the manufacturer.
3 03 01 02
01.0
Provide grid system of type, size and finish indicated in drawings and
schedules. It shall comply with ASTM C635 or an equivalent Standard.
Grid systems shall be installed true, straight and level with border
strips or indicated drop referring to finish floors level. The maximum
deflection under the nominal drop shall be less than 3 mm.
02.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
3 03 01 03
02.0
03.0
NRC: Provide mineral fibre and special function tiles and panels with a
minimum sound absorption (NRC) of 0,30 or as otherwise indicated.
They shall be tested by an independent laboratory according to ASTM
C423 or an equivalent Standard.
04.0
CAC: Provide tiles and panels with indicated Ceiling Attenuation Class
(CAC). To achieve the indicated CAC a ceiling overlay of mineral fibre
mats of the necessary thickness, 120 cm at both sides of a separating
wall may be applied.
04.1
04.2
Fire Rating
Provide fire rating either for the support structure and suspended ceiling as a whole
or for the suspended ceiling alone as indicated in schedules. Ceiling systems shall
either be UL-listed or tested by an authorised and independent laboratory according
to ISO 834 or ASTM E119 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 04
3 03 04 01
3 06 Demonstration
Removing of tiles and panels for maintenance purposes and handling of clip-on (in)
metal panels shall be demonstrated to Employer's personnel.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works as recommended by manufacturer to ensure that it is without
damage at time of Substantial Completion.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
4 02 Units of Measurement
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will be measured by m2.
Ceiling tiles and panels will be measured by m2.
Acoustical wall treatment will be measured by m2.
Provision of joints in wall lining will be measured by linear m.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09500 Acoustical Treatment
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment
and materials, and performing all operations in connection with production and
installation of special ceiling surfaces.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
Related Sections
09250
Gypsum Board
09500
Acoustical Treatment
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
ISO 834:
ISO 3574:
ISO 3575:
ISO 6361 - 2:
ISO 6362 - 2:
ISO 7599:
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
1 02 01 06
ASTM C 635: 00
ASTM C 636: 96
ASTM E 119: 00
British Standards
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 476 - 6: 89
Method of test for fire propagation for products
BS 476 - 7: 97
Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of
products
1 02 01 07
BS 1186 - 2: 88
BS 6496: 84 (91)
BS 6497: 84 (91)
German Standards
DIN 18180: 89
1 02 03
Other References
UL 263: 97
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Coffered ceiling - ceiling with recessed panels
Furring channels - steel profiles running crosswise to main carriers, fixed to these ones,
onto which the plasterboard is screwed
Main (intermediate) carriers - row of steel profiles for suspended ceilings which is fixed
by hangers to the substructure
Modular pan grid - metal pan-type suspension grid which allows dry-walls to be fixed to
the suspended ceiling
Runners - U-shaped steel profiles used as floor and ceiling members for drywalls; main
carriers of T-grid systems are also called runners
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg C
max.
min.
NFPA
degree Celsius
maximum
minimum
National Fire protection Association (US)
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
RH
UL
Relative Humidity
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
1 04 System Description
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of acoustical tile and panel and metal support system
for suspended ceilings specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings, finishes and
maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced Standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for all ceiling tiles, panels
and metal support systems.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of ceiling tiles, panels and suspension systems, with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of work .
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 01 03
All panels or strips shall match in finish/Color. Oilcanning, warping or
the metal pan are unacceptable.
other deformity of
Metal acoustical panels or strips shall have the following fire performance characteristics,
tested per ASTM E84.
1.
Flame Spread:
25 or less.
2.
Smoke Developed:
25 or less.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Contractors internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to
specification and referenced standards prior to assembly or installation.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.
1 07 02
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Products
Suspension Profiles
2 01 02 01
01.0
02.0
Profiles for ceilings with open joints shall be painted satin black
with manufacturer's standard enamel paint. Perimeter trim shall
be painted as ceiling panels.
03.0
04.0
05.0
Steel Panels
Panels shall be made of galvanized steel, minimum thickness 0,4 mm, complying with ISO
3575 or an equivalent Standard. Coating designation shall be G60 (185 g/ m2) for interior
use and G90 (275 g/ m2) for exterior use.
Finish: Powder organic coating shall comply with BS 6497 or an equivalent Standard, with
a minimum thickness of 60 micrometer.
2 01 02 02
Aluminium Panels
Panels shall be made of aluminium alloy, minimum thickness 0,5 mm, complying with ISO
6361 or an equivalent Standard.
Finish: Powder organic coating shall comply with BS 6496 or an equivalent Standard, with
a minimum thickness of 60 micrometer.
Anodised finish shall comply with ISO 7599 or an equivalent Standard, with a minimum
thickness of 10 micrometer.
2 02 Mirror Ceilings
2 02 01
Suspension Profiles
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
05.0
2 02 02
Panels
Mirror panels shall be of composite construction. The first quality glass mirror of minimum
3,0 mm thickness shall be fixed to a substrate by means of adhesive to get a highly even
element which is deflection and shatter resistant. The edges shall be chamfered with
rounded corners unless otherwise indicated. The substrate may be of reinforced gypsum,
wood particleboard or mineral fibreboard, depending on the fire-rating requirements. Fire
rated panels shall be either UL-listed or tested by an authorised and independent
laboratory according to ISO 834, or ASTM E119, or an equivalent Standard.
Suspension Profiles
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
2 03 02
Panels
2 03 02 01
Steel Panels
Panels shall be made of steel, minimum thickness 0,4 mm, complying with ISO 3574 or an
equivalent Standard.
They shall be produced with a coffer of indicated height. Surfaces shall be even without
warp or buckle.
Finish: Provide decorative finish as indicated. If finish does not provide full rust protection,
panels shall have one coat of rust inhibitive primer before applying the indicated finish.
2 03 02 02
Aluminium Panels
Panels shall be made of aluminium alloy, minimum thickness 0,5 mm, complying with ISO
209 and 6361 or an equivalent Standard.
They shall be produced with a coffer of indicated height. Surfaces shall be even without
warp or buckle.
Finish: Panels shall have a decorative finish as indicated.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
2 04 02
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
Tiles
Gypsum plasterboard tiles shall comply with DIN 18180 or an equivalent Standard. Tiles
shall be made from light weight gypsum (less than 900 kg/m3), fire resistant (30 minutes)
and impregnated. Provide an appropriate Third Party certificate.
The visible side shall be either textured gypsum or coated with smooth or textured PVC,
complying with BS 476 Pt 6-7 (class m1, non-toxic, and non-inflammable). Both solutions
shall prepare the tiles with a finish surface. Patterns will be selected by the Engineer.
Suspension System
2 05 01 01
2 05 01 02
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 05 02
Panels
2 05 02 01
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Solid wood panels of indicated kind shall comply with BS 1186 - class 1 wood or an
equivalent Standard. The minimum thickness shall be 13 mm and the maximum width 120
mm unless otherwise indicated. Panels shall be prepared with tongue and groove.
2 05 02 02
Particleboard Panels
Particleboard used for producing panels shall comply with BS 5669 or an equivalent
Standard. Boards shall have a minimum thickness of 13 mm with grooved edges, prepared
for being attached to each other by means of separate tongues.
The visible side, including edges, shall be veneered with class 1 sliced veneer of minimum
thickness 0,5 mm and wood species indicated.
Veneer shall comply with BS 1186 or an equivalent Standard.
2 05 02 03
2 05 02 04
Finish
Linear wood panels shall be factory finished. They shall have one priming- and two finish
coats. Finish shall be semi-gloss transparent unless otherwise indicated.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
Execution
3 01 General Examination
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Make sure that installation
work, such as electrical and plumbing work, which has to be carried out before the works
specified herein, is complete. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the works are complying with
requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
Pre-Installation Meeting shall be held with the different trades for co-ordination purposes.
For installation of suspended ceilings establish finish floor level and mark it securely in
each room.
3 03 Installation
Installation of suspended ceilings shall not be performed when the building is excessively
cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior
conditions during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions, governing regulations and in
compliance with reflected ceiling plans and final shop drawings.
3 03 01
3 03 01 01
Suspension System
Provide suspension system of size and type adequate for the proposed panels. The
suspension systems shall be installed true; straight and level with indicated drop referring
to finish floor level.
Suspension profiles shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing
structure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's instructions for the weight of the
ceiling, including luminaries and air diffusers. The maximum deflection under the nominal
drop shall be less than 3 mm. Fix perimeter angle of indicated shape to surrounding walls.
3 03 01 02
Panels
Provide panels of type size and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules.
The panels shall be fixed by clip-on method after installation of electrical and mechanical
equipment. Follow manufacturer's instructions!
3 03 02
Mirror Ceiling
3 03 02 01
Suspension System
The T-grid systems are available in the following standard grids: 60 x 60, 62.5 x 62.5, 60 x
120, 62.5 x 125 cm. They are normally produced in two different widths, either standard 25
mm or small 15 mm.
Provide T-grid system of size, type and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules. It
shall comply with ASTM C635 or an equivalent Standard. Grid systems shall be installed
true, straight and level with border strips or indicated drop referring to finish floors level.
Main runner T's shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing
structure. Spacing of hangers shall follow manufacturer's instructions for the weight of the
ceiling, including luminaries and air diffusers. The maximum deflection under the nominal
drop shall be less than 3 mm. Cross T's, pre-manufactured for the module size, shall be set
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
in between the main runners. Fix perimeter angle of indicated shape to surrounding walls.
Installation shall comply with ASTM C636 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 02 02
3 03 02 03
Tolerances
3 03 02 04
Width of joints
3 03 03
3 03 04
3 03 05
3 03 05 01
Suspension System
3 03 05 01 01
Main carriers shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the load bearing structure.
Furring shall be fixed to main carriers with standard drywall screws. Spacing of hangers
and main carriers shall follow table 1(see Annex). Spacing of furring channels shall follow
panel manufacturer's instructions. The maximum deflection under the nominal drop shall be
less than 3 mm. Provide and install perimeter trim as indicated in drawings and schedules.
3 03 05 01 02
Main carriers (intermediate channels) shall be fixed by means of adjustable hangers to the
load bearing structure. Furring channels shall be fixed to main carriers with manufacturer's
special clamps.
Spacing of hangers, main carriers and furring channels shall follow manufacturer's
instructions for the weight of the ceiling, including installation elements like luminaries. The
maximum deflection under the nominal drop shall be less than 3 mm.
3 03 05 02
Panels
Provide panels of type, size, species and finish as indicated in drawings and schedules.
The panels shall be mounted after installation of electrical and mechanical equipment.
They shall be fixed with special non-visible clamps, screwed to the furring by holding the
groove-side. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Provide a continuous shadow gap along the perimeter of indicated width. Panels shall be
cut in good workmanship parallel to the perimeter.
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
3 06 Demonstration
Removing of tiles and panels for maintenance purposes and handling of clip-on (in) metal
panels shall be demonstrated to Employer's personnel.
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that it is without damage at time of handing over.
3 08 Schedules
Contractor shall provide schedules of his works, co-ordinated with other trades, prior to
commencing of installation.
>150 N/ m2
>300 N/ m2
<300 N/ m2
intermediate carriers
<500 N/ m2
1300
1000
850
850
750
600
60 x 40 mm
furring 50 x 30 mm
1) Spacing for intermediate carriers means centres of hangers and spacing for
furring means centres of intermediate carriers.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
4 02 Units of Measurement
Suspension systems whether visible or non-visible will be measured by m2.
Ceiling tiles and panels will be measured by m2.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09545 Special Ceiling Surfaces
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials,
and performing all operations in connection with production and installation of wood flooring.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0
02.0
03.0
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
1 02 01 06
1 02 02
ISO 631:
ISO 1072:
ISO 1324:
ISO 2457:
ISO 5320:
ISO 5326:
ISO 5327:
ISO 5328:
ISO 5334:
ISO 11600:
British Standards
BS 1297: 87
BS 4072: 78
Codes
BS 8201: 87
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Brick pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips arranged in a parallel direction
Component Square of mosaic parquet flooring - an assembly of fingers placed edge to
edge, making up a square, the side of which is equal to the length of the finger
Deck pattern - parquet flooring composed of strips of one or several series of equal lengths,
their butt joints being arranged on sleepers
Face of parquet strip - the upper surface of a parquet strip, intended to remain visible after
laying
Herringbone pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of the same dimensions,
having the ends cut at right angle, laid perpendicularly one to another, at an angle of 45
relative to the directions of walls and / or sleepers
Longitudinal axis - an imaginary line passing through the centre of gravity of the paving
block and at an equal distance from the side faces
Mosaic parquet finger - an element of solid wood of small dimensions and regular shape,
having flat edges
Mosaic parquet panel - an assembly of component squares having the same dimensions,
placed edge to edge in a chequered pattern, in a single layer and preassembled by
juxtaposition, either by means of a material fixed temporarily (paper glued on the face) or by
means of a sufficiently flexible material, permanently fixed to the back
Parquet - an assembly of parquet strips or of panels
Parquet strip - a wood element with a flat face, having regular thickness and a constant
profile, intended to form parquet by assembly with other similar components
Skirting - a piece of wood having a simple side or a shaped one, intended to cover the joints
between the wall and the flooring
Softwood board - piece of square-sawn softwood under 47 mm thickness and more than
100 mm in width
Softwood strip- piece of square-sawn softwood under 47 mm thickness and under 100 mm
in width
Solid wood paving block - a piece of solid wood having the fibres appreciably parallel to
the longitudinal axis
Sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations, which contain frequencies within
a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
Stone cut pattern - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of equal length, their butt
joints being arranged alternately
Strip patterns - parquet flooring composed of parquet strips of unequal lengths, their ends
being matched at random
Wear layer - a part of the thickness of a parquet strip situated between the face and the
upper plane of the groove or tongue
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg C
max.
min.
UL
degree Celsius
maximum
minimum
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of floor specified, including label compliance, fire-ratings,
finishes and maintenance instructions.
1 05 03
Samples
Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes for flooring, skirting and
division strips.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of wooden flooring and with a history of successful production
acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors internal quality control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification
and referenced standards prior to assembly or installation.
Checking suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.
1 07 02
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Products
02.0
03.0
04.0
The moisture content of any board at the time of delivery shall not
exceed 15 %.
All pieces shall be free from decay and insect attack including
attack by ambrosia beetle.
02.0
The finished strips shall have the dimensions and the profile
specified in Tables 1 through 4 of ISO 1072. Width shall be from
30 to 100 mm; length 200 mm or more.
03.0
The faces shall be flat. Contiguous faces and edges shall form
parallel sharp edges. The ends shall be perpendicular to the
edges within a tolerance of 0,4 %. The strip edges and ends shall
have the same profile. The face shall be smooth and the
manufacturing faults limited, depending on the required grades.
Grades for oak and beech wood strips shall meet the
classification in ISO 1324 respectively 2457.
04.0
02.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
width:
18 to 25 mm, with preferred widths of 20, 22,4 and 25
mm; length:100 to 165, with preferred lengths of 100, 112, and
125 mm;
03.0
The finger edges shall be machine planed; the faces and ends
shall be finely sawn. Adjacent faces edges and ends shall form
parallel sharp edges. The ends shall be perpendicular to the
edges within a tolerance of 0,4 %.
04.0
05.0
2 04 Accessories
2 04 01
Skirting
Provide wood mouldings for skirting of species and shape as indicated in drawings and
schedules. The minimum size shall be 15 x 50 mm (width x height), with top and base
slightly sloped. The face shall be smoothly ground and receive the same finish as the
flooring.
2 04 02
Division Strips
Provide division strips for separating parquet from other floor finishes or for providing joints.
They shall be of aluminium or brass as indicated. The height of these strips shall be equal to
the thickness of the parquet. They shall be fixed within the layer of adhesive.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Execution
3 01 General Examination
Examine structure where work of this section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the
works are complying with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
3 03 Installation
Installation of wood flooring shall not be performed when the building is excessively cold and
damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions
during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
3 03 01
02.0
03.0
040.
3 03 02
3 03 02 01
Base Preparation
The Base shall be rigid, level and dry. Use cementious based spackling compound to
produce an even surface. Let it dry sufficiently, grind it smoothly and broom clean or vacuum
before laying the floor. Localised variations in level shall not exceed 3 mm from the mean
when measured over a 3 m distance using a straight edge.
3 03 02 02
Laying
01.0
02.0
03.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 03
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Finishing
Strip parquet flooring may be ground and finished before laying if required in schedules. All
other wood flooring shall be ground after laying with machines until the surface is even and
smooth. Machines shall be equipped with a proper vacuum system to avoid dust
development.
Provide the following finish:
* 01.0
Wax application:
Apply one impregnating coat of transparent varnish and grind it
slightly with fine sandpaper after it is dry. Apply one or more
coats of liquid wax, depending on manufacturer's instructions.
Allow to dry and buff after each course, or:
* 02.0
One-can sealer:
Apply the first coat of sealer with brush according to
manufacturer's instructions. Grind it slightly with fine sandpaper
after it is dry. Apply the second coat similar to the first one, or :
* 03.0
3 03 04
Accessories
3 03 04 01
Skirting
Provide skirting along walls, columns etc. of materials and finish indicated in schedules.
Skirting shall be fixed by means of plastic dowels and screws to the wall. Use countersunk
oval-headed, nickel-plated screws.
3 03 04 02
02.0
03.0
04.0
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that finished floors are without damage at time of handing over.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
4 02 Units of Measurement
Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Treads and risers according to type, material and finish will be measured by m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
Division strips and joints will be measured according to type by length (m).
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
BS 1297 - Table 1
Finished thickness
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
19
21
28
65
90
113
137
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09550 Wood Flooring
Fingers
Thickness
Component squares
Width
Length Thickness
Width
x
Length
Panels
Number Thickness
of
fingers
Width
x
Length
Number of
component
squares
20
100
100
x
100
400
x
400
16
22,4
112
112
x
112
448
x
448
16
22,4
112
10
112
x
112
10
448
x
448
16
25
125
10
125
x
125
10
500
x
500
16
10
10
On a single panel
On each component
square of the panel
Thickness
0,2
0,2
0,2
Width
0,5
0,2
+0,1 - 0,2
Length
0,5
0,2
0,2
Diagonal 1
0,8
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
GENERAL ................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. 5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
SCOPE ................................................................................................. 2
REFERENCES ........................................................................................ 2
TOLERANCES ........................................................................................ 2
SUBMITTALS.......................................................................................... 3
MOCK-UP ............................................................................................. 4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................... 4
WARRANTY ........................................................................................... 5
STONE.................................................................................................. 5
ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................... 5
MIXES OF MORTAR ................................................................................ 6
FABRICATION ........................................................................................ 7
STONE FABRICATION ............................................................................. 7
FINISHES .............................................................................................. 8
EXECUTION ................................................................................................ 8
3.1
3.2
3.3
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
This section covers requirements for marble and granite works including
labor materials, products, equipment and services to complete the stone
flooring and wall covering work specified herein.
Testing and inspection of stone units specified herein.
The related documents article contained herein is included for reference
only. All items contained therein are an assessment of the work, which
should be presumed to be complete.
1.2
References
ASTM C509-94 Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Reformed Gasket
and Sealing Material.
ASTM C615-96 Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
ASTM D1622-93 Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular
Plastics.
ASTM D 1623-78 (1995) Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion
Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
1.3
Tolerances
1.3.1
1.0 mm
1.0 mm
0.5 mm
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
1.3.2
Alignment of joints:
Plus/minus
1.3.3
0.5 mm
1.3.4
2 mm
1.3.5
0.5 mm
1.3.6
1 mm
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
plus/minus 1.5
plus/minus 2.5 mm
plus/minus 3 mm
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1:100 generally
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.5 Mock-Up
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.6.2
Ensure that each unit delivered to the site is clearly and properly
labeled as to classification and installation location in accordance
with labeling notations indicated on reviewed shop drawings.
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
1.6.7
1.6.8
1.6.9
Warrant this work for a period of five (5) years from the date of
Completion of Contract.
1.7.2
1.7.3
PRODUCTS
2.1
Stone
As listed in the Interior Color and Finishes Schedule.
a)
b) Granite stone, supplied for this Project shall be from one quarry with
minimum abrasion resistance of 45 including stone for work of other
Sections, and shall be sound, hard, durable, well seasoned and of
uniform strength, color and texture, free of quarry sap, flaws,
seams, sand holes, iron pyrites, harmful quantities of radiation, or
other mineral or organic defects. If there is a distinguishable rift in
the granite, all granite for the Project shall be cut in one direction
only as specified herein unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
2.2.2
Cement:
ASTM C150, non-staining, Grey and White Portland work; white
cement for pointing mixes.
2.2.3
Sand:
Consisting of fine granular material composed of hard, strong,
durable mineral particles, free from injurious amounts of saline,
alkaline, organic or other deleterious substances.
2.2.4
Water:
Clean and free of oil, acid, alkali, organic and other deleterious
matter.
2.2.5
Color pigments:
Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, non-staining. Color to be
selected by the Engineer.
2.2.6
2.2.7
Sealer:
Recommended by the installer and accepted by the Engineer.
2.3.2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
2.3.3
Pointing compound:
One part non-staining cement.
1-1/2 parts white silica sand tempered with lime putty.
Color pigment as required to selection of Engineer.
More than one color may be required as directed by the
Engineer.
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.4 Fabrication
2.4.1
General
a) As far as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop with the
various parts or assemblies ready for erection at the site.
b) Where possible, take field measurements and levels required to
verify or supplements those shown on the Drawings for the proper
layout and installation of the work. Coordinate dimensional
tolerances in adjacent building elements and confirm prior to the
commencement of the work.
c) Fabricate members to profiles shown on the Drawings.
d) Provide for expansion and contraction joints as necessary.
e) Accurately fit together all joints, corners and miters. Match
components carefully to produce perfect continuity of line and design.
2.5 Stone Fabrication
a) Stonework shall be executed by skilled workers in accordance with
the best practice of a company specializing in the type of stonework
specified, indicated and required.
b) Identify the rift direction on a concealed surface of each unit. Panels
shall be cut generally parallel to the rift and all panels shall be cut in
the same direction.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
Lewis holes and holes for other back anchoring devices shall not be
closer than 50 mm to the edges.
g) Do cutting and drilling required for this work and for work of other
Sections.
h) Do not use impact or hammer drills on stone; use only diamond drill
bits.
i)
In cutting and fitting the edges shall be carefully cut and ground to a
perfect fit and all cutting shall be done in such a manner as not to
impair the strength or appearance of the material.
j)
2.6 Finishes
a) Finishes shall be uniform and non-directional unless otherwise
approved.
b) Finishing shall apply to all surfaces exposed in the finished work.
c) Finish P: polished.
3
EXECUTION
3.1.2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.2 Installation
3.2.1
General
a)
b)
c)
Sponge or drench stone units with clean water just prior to setting in
mortar.
d)
Set stone work level, plumb, square and true with uniform joints.
Chipped, broken or blemished units shall be rejected.
e)
f)
The alignment face for stone panels shall be the outside face unless
otherwise.
g)
h)
i)
Cut and drill for items supplied under other Sections. Replace stone
damaged by this operation.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
3.2.2
Installation - Flooring
a)
b)
c)
d)
Butter back of stone units with mortar slurry and place stone units
on a mortar setting bed.
e)
f)
g)
Grout joints, other than control joints, solid with mortar and point
with colored pointing compound. Remove masking.
h)
3.2.3
a)
b)
c)
3.2.4
Coping units
Coping shall be set with faces plumb and true in a full bed of mortar upon
completion of the walls the remainder of the bed joint shall be filled
solidly with mortar front and back and the exterior face of the mortar
tasted smooth.
Even off filler. When epoxy has cured, remove tape and clean residue.
3.2.5
i)
Expansion Joints
The Contractor shall ensure that the expansion joints are bedded
fully in accordance with manufacturers instruction.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Division 09 Finishes
ii)
The Contractor shall ensure that all aluminum wall tiling trims are of
a proprietary type fit for their purpose, with sections pop riveted
together with no protrusions between the rear of the aluminum
surface and the face of the blockwork walls.
3.3 Cleaning
i)
ii)
iii)
After grouting and pointing, clean stone with stiff fiber brushes and
water. The use of wire brushes, acids or sandblasting will not be
permitted. Flush down at completion.
iv)
v)
vi)
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with installation of resilient
flooring.
1 01 01
Section includes
01.0
PVC Flooring
02.0
Linoleum Flooring
03.0
04.0
Cork Flooring
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 06
British Standards
1 02 01 07
BS 476 -
BS EN 649 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings Homogeneous and
Heterogeneous Polyvinylchloride Floor Coverings
BS EN 650 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings - Polyvinylchloride Floor
Coverings on Jute Backing or on Polyester Felt with
Polyvinylchloride Backing.
BS EN 651 :
97
Resilient Floor Coverings - Polyvinylchloride Floor
Coverings with Foam Layer
BS EN 12104 :
00
German Standards
DIN 51958 : 79
DIN 51960 : 75
DIN 51961 : 84
DIN 53504 : 94
DIN 53505 : 00
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
DIN 53516 : 87
1 02 01 11
1 02 02
French Standards
NF T 51 109 : 86
NF T 54 209 : l.e.
Codes
BS 8203 : 87
1 02 03
1 02 04
Other References
CENELEC/EN
100015-1: 92
DHSS
IBM/ICL:
American Standards
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM F 1066
ASTM F 1303
ASTM F 1344
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
coned back - the back of flooring material is grooved for better adhesion
elastic product - The product of the tensile strength (expressed in MN/m2) and the
elongation at break (expressed by the increase in length as a fraction of the original
length).
sound - sound is understood to be mechanical vibrations which contain frequencies
within a range from approximately 16 to 16000 Hz
stud (studded) - flooring material which has a relief surface, studs may be round or
square
1 03 02
Abbreviations
CENELEC
'Committee European de Normalisation Electro technique'(European
Committee for Electro technical Standardization)
deg C
DHSS
IBM
l.e.
max.
min.
MJ/m3
degree Celsius
British 'Department of Health and Social Security'
Int. Business Machines (US)
last edition
maximum
minimum
Mega Joule / m3
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
Pt.
UL
Part
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each type of floor specified, including certificates, fire-ratings,
finishes and maintenance instructions.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
1 05 03
Samples
a) Provide minimum three (3) samples for initial selection purposes
for each type of floor including manufacturer's colour chart for
each sample.
b) Three 300mm long samples of each type of resilient base.
c) Samples of full range of available colours of transition strips
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of resilient flooring and with a history of successful production
acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and
the
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work
.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at
least five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 01 03
a)
b)
c)
Prior to commencing the work, the installer shall visit the site and verify in writing
that all substrates and conditions are acceptable to receive the work.
d)
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
e)
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 06 04 02
1 07 02
Part 2:
Products
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
2 01 02
2 01 02 01
2 01 03
2 01 05
01.0
02.0
The 'elastic product' of the wear layer shall not be less than 2
MJ/m3.
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
Provide heavy duty PVC flooring, consisting of an interlocking tile system, which is laid
loosely onto the subfloor.
Provide tile size, thickness and finish as indicated.
Provide special, inclined elements for access ramps where indicated.
The PVC tiles shall comply with the following
the
indicated
Hardness
NFT 51109
Abrasion
DIN 53516
Reaction Resistance
DIN 53504
Elongation at rupture
DIN 53504
Inflammability (STR,STG)
Inflammability (GM2)
Resistance to cigarette burn DIN 51961
Dimensional stability
CTSB 2182
Residualindentation
under load
NFT 54209
mm
remanent
NFT 54209
Coefficient of friction
Chemical resistance
DIN 51958
according to
:
combustible
combustible
of burning
<0,15
0,13
generally good
2 03 Synthetic Rubber
The floor tiles are produced in different thickness between 2,5 and 6mm overall
thickness. The stud height ranges between 0,3 and 1,5 mm. Synthetic rubber may be
used to reduce impact sound.
Synthetic rubber flooring tiles shall be made of homogeneous, calendared, vulcanized
rubber with mineral fillers and colour pigments.
Provide flooring tiles of overall thickness, stud height and colour as indicated.
Synthetic rubber flooring shall meet the following requirements:
01.0
02.0
Abrasion to be less than 200 mm3 (load 0,5 kg) when tested
according to
DIN 53516 or an equivalent Standard.
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
Flooring tiles for extremely heavy traffic areas e.g. where fork lifts
are used (max 50 kp/cm2) shall have a coned back.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
2 05 Accessories
2 05 01
2 05 02
Skirting
01.0
02.0
03.0
Division Strips
Division strips for separating different flooring materials or for providing joints, shall be
of aluminium or brass as indicated. The height of these strips shall be equal to the
thickness of the flooring material.
2 05 03
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
Execution
3 01 General Examination
Examine structure where work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be
used for the works are complying with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
3 03 Installation
Installation of flooring material shall not be performed when the building is excessively
cold and damp. Temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior
conditions during occupation shall be maintained during and after installation.
Resilient floor tiles shall be laid to pattern as indicated, if not, tiled areas shall be
centered and balanced.
3 03 01
3 03 03
02.0
03.0
04.0
Synthetic Rubber
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Sub floors must be
smooth, hard, clean and dry before laying. Uneven sub-floors shall be spackled until the
required smoothness is reached.
3 03 05
Accessories
3 03 05 01
Skirting
01.0
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 05 02
3 03 05 03
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
02.0
03.0
Joints
01.0
01.1
02.0
02.0
03.0
3 07 Protection
Protect all works to ensure that finished floors are without damage at time of handing
over.
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
4 02 Units of Measurement
Flooring according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Treads and risers according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by
m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type and material by length (m).
Installation of division strips will be measured according to type by length (m).
Provision of joints will be measured according to type and width by length (m).
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09650 resilient Flooring
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09680 - Carpet
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work of this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials, and performing
all operations in connection with providing and laying-out of carpets.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
02.0
Carpet Tile
03.0
04.0
Adhesives
05.0
Accessories
Related Sections
05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assembly
09550 Wood Flooring
09650 Resilient Flooring
1 02
References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
EN ISO 105/B02: 00
EN ISO 105/E01: 96
EN ISO 105/X12: 01
ISO 140-8: 97
ISO 354: 97
ISO 717-2: 82
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
ISO 1763: 86
ISO 1765: 86
ISO 1766: 99
ISO 2424: 92
ISO 2551: 81
ISO 3018: 74
ISO 8543: 98
ISO 9239: 97
ISO/TR 10361: 00
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
1 02 01 05
ASTM D 2859:96
ASTM D 3676:96
European Standards
EN 984: 95
EN 985: 95
EN 986:95
EN 994: 96
EN 995: 96
EN 1269:97
EN 1307: 97
EN 1318: 97
EN 1470:98
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 01 06
1 02 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
EN 1471: 97
prEN 1813 : 98
prEN 1814 : 98
prEN 1815 : 98
prEN 1963 : 98
British Standards
BS 4407: 88
BS 4790: 87
BS 4815: 90
BS 5287: 88
BS 5808: 91
Carpet Underlays
Codes
BS 5325: 01
Coverings
1 02 03
Other References
1 02 03 01
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
1 03 01 01
General Terms
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
textile floor covering without pile - a floor covering composed of a non-pile textile usesurface and possibly a substrate.
.traffic - usage expressed in terms of foot traffic (person) per unit of time or as light,
medium or heavy, in order to define need for matching carpet construction, which
normally increases as traffic increases.
use-surface - upper part of a textile floor covering directly exposed to traffic
1 03 01 02
1 03 01 03
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
primary backing - a coarse textile fabric into the pile yarn is stitched and to which a back
coating may be applied, or to which a secondary backing may be laminated. Primary
backing, the matrix used in making tufted carpet, consisting of woven or non-woven
fabric, usually jute or polypropylene, into which pile yarn tufts are stitched.
secondary backing - a coarse textile laminated to the back of the primary backing to
reinforce the latter. Typical materials are jute, Polypropylene, latex foam or Vinyl.
1 03 01 04
coverings
1 05
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification
according to Section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
1 05 01 01
Commercial references
02.0
Characteristics
Type of construction
Fibre composition of use surface
Thickness of pile above substrate
Type of pile
Colour
Pattern
Rows
Gauge
Stitches
Dimensions
Tile size
Total thickness
Number of tufts and loops
Total mass per unit area
Mass of pile per unit area above the substrate
Surface pile density
Backing material
Apparent thickness of foam backing
Density of foam backing
03.0
Performance
Categories of use
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Durability
04.0
Additional characteristics
Dimensional stability
Electrostatic charge
Fire behaviour
Acoustic behaviour
Colour Fastness
05.0
-
1 05 01 02
Maintenance
Types of cleaning
Types of maintenance
Time schedule
Adhesive
Provide product data and Manufacturers instructions for each type of adhesive.
Give sufficient information in order the products can be used safely and without risk to
health.
1 05 01 03
Cushion or Underlay
Provide product data for each type of carpet cushion or underlay as well as accessories
proposed to be used.
Identify each material by Manufacturers catalogue number and general classification.
Give Manufacturers technical information, label analysis and other data required
demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings when indicated including seaming plan, method of joining
seams,direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge mouldings and bindings.
1 05 03
Samples
Submit at least 3 sample catalogues for initial purposes showing the full range of floor
covering carpets and exposed accessories available from the proposed manufacturers in
the specified qualities.
Prepare mock-ups of carpets at 1 m2 on selected locations of the actual structure, if
requested by the Architect.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of textile floor coverings and with a history of successful
production acceptable to the Engineer.
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 06 01 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least
five (5) years of documented experience.
1 06 02 01
Fire Behaviour
Textile floor coverings be non-readily ignitable in case of heavy domestic, general contract
and heavy contract use. They are proved non-readily ignitable if they pass the
Brandschacht test and fulfil the requirements placed on building materials of class B (in
accordance with DIN 4102 4).
Textile floor coverings be of low radius of effects of ignition in case of heavy domestic,
general contract and heavy contract use. They are proved having a low radius of effects of
ignition, if the radius of affected area is up to 35 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (in
accordance to BS 4790 / 5287),
Textile floor coverings be of at least medium radius of effects of ignition in case of
domestic use. They are proved having a medium radius of effects of ignition, if the radius of
affected area is between 35 mm and 75 mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (in
accordance to BS 4790 / 5287),
Textile floor coverings with radius of the affected area greater than 75 mm are
unsatisfactory and shall not be used.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
1 06 04 02
1 07 02
Environmental Requirements
Use ecologically desirable solvent free adhesives only if type of carpet and surface of the
ground allow doing so.
Store materials in area of installation at least 48 hours prior to installation.
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Products
2 01 01 01
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a radius of effects of ignition < 75
mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
13.0
14.0
15.0
Light shall be 5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 01 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
16.0
mg (in accordance
17.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
Light shall be
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
20.0
21.0
22.0
Carpets shall be suitable for use on stairs. The Manufacturer shall certify
the suitability.
2 01 02
2 01 02 01
mg (in
01.0
02.0
03.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
Ohm.
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
Acoustic behaviour: The calculated value for impact sound insulation
shall be between 20 40 dB (in accordance with ISO 717 2).
For insulation from sound through absorption of sound (absorption
coefficient) provide Manufacturers calculated value (in accordance with
EN 1307).
15.0
Light shall be
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
16.0
17.0
18.0
2 01 02 02
mg (in
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
16.0
17.0
Ohm.
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
18.0
19.0
20.0
Light shall be
22.0
23.0
2 01 03
2 01 03 01
mg (in
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with Castor chair Test EN
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
12.0
13.0
Ohm.
14.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
15.0
16.0
Light shall be
be
17.0
18.0
19.0
2 01 03 02
mg (in
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
Ohm.
18.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
19.0
20.0
Light shall be
be
21.0
22.0
2 02 Carpet Tile
2 02 01
2 02 01 01
02.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
03.0
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
Fire behaviour: The carpet shall have a radius of effects of ignition < 75
mm according to Hot Metal Nut Method (conforming to BS 4790 / 5287).
13.0
14.0
Light shall be
15.0
16.0
17.0
2 02 01 02
mg (in accordance
02.0
03.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
04.0
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
Light shall be
20.0
21.0
22.0
mg (in
16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
2 02 02
2 02 02 01
02.0
03.0
04.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
Ohm.
13.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
14.0
15.0
Light shall be
be
16.0
17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
17.0
18.0
2 02 02 02
mg (in
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with Castor chair Test EN
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm.
16.0
17.0
Ohm.
18.0
19.0
20.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Light shall be
22.0
23.0
2 02 03
mg (in
02.0
03.0
04.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
Carpet shall be chair resistant (in accordance with Castor chair Test EN
985). Use rolls with a radius mm and flight width of 20 mm
12.0
13.0
Ohm.
14.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
15.0
19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Light shall be
be
17.0
18.0
19.0
2 02 03 02
mg (in
02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
08.0
09.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
15.0
16.0
17.0
Ohm.
18.0
The carpet shall be non-readily ignitable (in accordance with DIN 4102).
19.0
20.0
21.0
Light shall be
Carpets shall be suitable for use on stairs. The Manufacturer shall certify the suitability.
Underlay types
Underlay is available in latex rubber, sponge rubber, felt and synthetic, jute, foam in
Polyurethane and Polyethylene. It is also manufactured in a variety of densities,
thickness, and weights to meet light, medium or heavy conditions.
2 03 01 01
Latex Rubber
The versatile chemistry of Latex Rubber permits a variety of flat and profiled, low
gauge and high gauge products to be produced covering all markets requirements. In
addition, the particular appeal of the Latex rubber process is its ability to offer flame
retardancy.
2 03 01 01 01
01.0
Weight:
908 g/m2
02.0
: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,50 mm
05.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
2 03 01 01 02
GDU-Gen.Domestic
01.0
Weight:
1.350 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,00 mm
05.0
2 03 01 01 03
01.0
Weight:
1.665 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 7,00 mm
05.0
2 03 01 02
Sponge Rubber
The flexibility inherent in the Sponge Rubber production process permits a greater
diversity of product types, patterns and styles. Sponge Rubber underlay is
aesthetically pleasing, highly functional and offers exceptional underfoot comfort and
carpet protection. Sponge Rubber underlay resists contraction and extension in textile
products keeping commercial carpet installation totally flat whilst spreading load to
offer maximum carpet performance through a perfect combination of cushioning and
support. It absorbs the damaging abrasive energy of continuous foot and wheeled
traffic taking pressure off the pile to improve wears life and appearance retention.
2 03 01 02 01
01.0
Weight:
2.712 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 6,90 mm
05.0
2 03 01 02 02
01.0
Weight:
3.200 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 11,00 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 6,00 mm
22
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
05.0
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
2 03 01 02 03
01.0
Weight:
3.300 g/ m2
02.0
Length: 8,75 m
03.0
Width: 1,37 m
04.0
Thickness: 9,50 mm
05.0
2 03 01 03
2 03 01 03 01
01.0
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 30,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 5,00 mm
500 g/ m2
2 03 01 03 02
01.0
Type: Needle Felt (60% Recycled wool & synthetic fibres, 40%
Recycled jute fibres)
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 11,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,37 m
05.0
950 g/ m2
23
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 03 01 03 03
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
01.0
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 30,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 10,00 mm
1.100 g/ m2
2 03 01 04
2 03 01 04 01
Jute
Another needle felt carpet underlay most suited for heavy contract use available from
100% reclaimed jute fibres, and 100% Polyethylene film as backing.
01.0
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 25,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,37 m
05.0
Thickness: 9,00 mm
980 g/ m2
2 03 01 04 02
Polyester fibres
Another needle felt carpet underlay most suited for contract use available from 100% Polyester
fibres.
01.0
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 40,00 m
04.0
Width: 2,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 5,00 mm
500 g/ m2
2 03 01 04 03
Polyethylene foam
Polyethylene foam underlay most suited for light domestic use with excellent sound
insulating properties. It is fire-resistant and water-resistant.
01.0
02.0
Weight:
03.0
Length: 50,00 m
04.0
Width: 1,00 m
05.0
Thickness: 12,00 mm
340 g/ m2
24
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
2 04
Adhesives
This range covers adhesives used for Stretched Carpet Installation, Glue Down and
Double Stick Installation (Sub-floor to underlay & underlay to carpet).
Adhesives shall provide a firm and durable bond.
The adhesive shall not have a harmful effect on the floor covering, underlay or base and,
after use, they shall be odourless, non-flammable and non-toxic.
Special consideration shall be given to softening points of adhesives as they may be
required to withstand high temperatures if rooms are not air-conditioned.
2 04 01
Type of Adhesives
2 04 01 01
SBR Emulsion
A water-based emulsion of a blend of styrene-butadiene which may contain synthetic
resin modifiers and/or fillers.
2 04 01 02
Acrylic Emulsion
An acrylate ester copolymer emulsion, which may contain resin modifiers and/or fillers.
2 04 02
2 04 03
Waterproof Tape
This tape is used for joining underlay and seaming foam backed carpets in conjunction
with seaming cement.
2 05
2 05 01
Accessories
01.0
02.0
Base cap: Specify types, finish and colour as selected by the Engineer
03.0
04.0
For stair nosing, rubber or aluminium type of square or round nose shall
be used with ribbed surface, one piece per stair treads width. Provide
colour and finish as proposed by the Engineer.
Wooden Grippers
See Annex 6 figure 2: Wooden Grippers
Grippers are made from high-grade resin bonded plywood. Five (5) ply of six (6) mm
thickness machined on one edge to a defined angle and penetrated from the
underside by two (2) rows of passive golden pins. Pins are set at an angle of 60
degree to eliminate pull out and bending even when power stretching. Carpet backing
is penetrated to allow for correct tension.
25
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 05 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Metal Grippers
Metal grippers are manufactured entirely from galvanized steel for strength and are
used where Wooden Grippers are inappropriate.
2 05 02 01
Skirting Gripper
See Annex 6 figure 3: Skirting
Skirting Gripper is used when, for whatever reason, a fixing cannot be made directly
into or onto the sub-floor. It is fixed to the skirting board with 19-mm ring shank nails.
The carpet is then stretched and hooked onto the steel teeth trimmed and tucked into
the gully in the normal way. A special cutting tool is unnecessary as Skirting Gripper is
scored every 40-mm so that short length can be snapped off as required.
2 05 03
Aluminium Edgings
See Annex 6 figure 4: Aluminium Edgings
This comprehensive range of aluminium edgings caters for carpets fitted with glue or
with underlay having choices from polished aluminium to simbrass, an economical and
attractive alternative to that of a natural brass, aluminium edging with a special
anodised finish simulating a brass effect.
2 05 03 01
Single Edgings
Single edgings are produced from high quality aluminium extrusions. Having a flat
base it makes it an ideal metal edging for the use on solid floor either mechanically
fixed or installed by using adhesive system.
2 05 03 01 01
2 05 03 01 02
2 05 03 01 03
2 05 03 01 04
2 05 03 01 05
2 05 01 03 06
2 05 01 03 07
2 05 03 02
Double Edgings
Double edgings are produced from high quality aluminium extrusions designed to
eliminate the need for sewing or binding and provide the perfect answer for joining two
different carpets at doorways. Anodised brass finishes are also available.
26
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 05 03 02 01
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
2 05 03 02 02
2 05 04
Cover Strips
See Annex 6 figure 4: Aluminium Edgings
Range of edgings for joints between floor coverings at the same height. Precision
drilled and countersunk. Screws provided in colours to complement the metal finish.
Designed for use on all carpet and resilient floor finishing.
2 05 05
Seam Strip
2 05 06
Stair Rods
See Annex 6 figure 5: Stair Rods
The stair rod collection will add a really distinctive touch to any staircase. It combines
the traditional elegance of individual stair rods with wall-to-wall carpeting or stair
runner.
2 05 06 01
2 05 06 02
2 05 06 03
2 05 06 03 01
Hinged Eye:
For rods where stairs are enclosed on either sides or where regular removal of stair
rods is required.
2 05 06 03 02
Plain Eye:
For rods inserted from side of open stairs or where there is enough room to install
rods through eyes on close cover stairs.
27
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 05 06 03 03
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
28
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
01.0
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
02.0
Verify that floor surfaces are dry smooth and flat within specified
tolerances and are ready to receive work.
Verify that concrete floors are ready for carpet installation by testing for
moisture emission rate and alkalinity. Moisture emission rate to be not
greater than 1,4 kg per 100 m2 per 24 hours when tested using calcium
chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. Alkalinity shall be in the range of 59 pH.
03.0
3 02 Surface Preparation
01.0
02.0
03.0
Fill minor or local spots, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler. Apply, trowel, and float filler or levelling composition to achieve
smooth, flat, hard surface.
04.0
05.0
06.0
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
Installation of stretched-in-carpet
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with Manufacturers instructions.
Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across
door openings. Use edge strip or combination tackless strip / edge strip where carpet
terminates at other floor coverings.
Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces,
but not more than 9 mm.
Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.
Lay out cushion so that seam will be perpendicular to or offset at least 150 mm from
carpet seams.
Butt cushions edges together and tape seams with waterproof tape.
Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
-
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Provide monolithic colour, pattern and texture match within any one area.
Install carpet tight and flat on sub-floor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform
appearance.
Double cut seams with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
Join seams using heat seam tape. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked,
and free of gaps.
Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and
hook firmly at other edges. Follow Manufacturers recommendations for method and
amount of stretch.
Extend carpet as base, finish up vertical surfaces to form base. Terminate top of base
with gripper or cap strip.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3 03 01 01
3 03 02
Installation of glued-in-carpet
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with Manufacturers instructions.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
-Locate seams in area of least traffic and parallel to main traffic.
-Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
-Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on
adjacent pieces .
-Locate change of colour or pattern between rooms under door centreline.
-Provide monolithic colour, pattern and texture match within any one area.
Install carpet tight and flat on sub-floor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform
appearance.
Double cut seams with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by Manufacturer. After
sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive.
Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with
seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.
30
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Extend carpet as base finish up vertical surfaces to form base. Terminate top of base
with cap strip.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3 03 02 01
3 03 03
3 03 04
Seams
01.0
02.0
03.0
04.0
3 03 05
Underlays
Underlays shall be laid in such manner that their joints and seams are staggered in
relation to the joints and seams of the floor covering and that no unevenness or joints
show through on the covering. Underlays and coverings shall be bonded and fixed
with adhesive in such a manner that a uniform bond is obtained over the entire area.
3 03 06
Adhesives
Shall be White Latex or an equal approved by the Engineer and recommended for the
purpose by the manufacturer of the approved carpet.
3 03 07
Accessories
3 03 07 01
Wooden Grippers
See Annex 6, Figure 2
Wooden grippers are designed for ease of installation to concrete floors, prenailed at
every 150 mm with masonry nails 20 mm long for firm fixing.
31
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 07 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Aluminium Edgings
See Annex 6, Figure 4.
01.0
The angle and sharpness of the teeth on the single and double
edgings for stretch installation ensure the firmest grip on the
carpet backing.
02.0
Cover strips are precision drilled and countersunk.
03.0
All edgings have a protective film on the face, which can be
easily removed once installation is complete.
3 03 07 03
Stair Rods
See Annex 6, Figure 5.
04.0
When ordering stair rods for a carpet runner, it is recommended
to measure the full width of the runner and add between 2in.
and 3 in. on either side depending upon personal preference,
the type of rod used and width of the staircase.
05.0
When carpet is fitted across entire width of tread, a stair rod is
required from wall to wall.
06.0
Measure stair width where tread and riser meet in crotch of
stair, be very precise and number treads from the top to the
bottom of stairs.
07.0
Various fixing eyes can be used for this installation depending
upon rod type required, quadrant, barrel eye and spring, side
fixing eyes.
3 03 07 04
3 04
3 05
Objective odour
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
3 07 Protection
Protect all carpet surfaces to ensure that they are without damage or uncleanness at
time of handing over by providing a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as
required over carpeting in direction of foot traffic, maintaining intact until carpeted
space is accepted by the owner.
3 08 Schedules
Prior to commencing of installation, contractor shall provide finish schedules of his
works, co-ordinated with other trades, and defining what category of use as well what
category of carpet is planned to be laid out where.
33
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Part 4:
Method of Measurement
4 01
General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for void less than 1.0
m2 .
4 02
Units of Measurement
Textile floor coverings according to type, material, thickness and finish will be
measured by m2.
Skirting will be measured according to type by length (m).
Division strips, expansion or movement joints, edgings, cover strips, seam strips, stair
rods and the like will be measured according to type by length (m).
Work to treads and risers are grouped together.
Work is measured the area or length in contact with the base.
34
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 5:
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Basis of Payment
5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all materials, equipment,
tools, storage facilities, water, power, for all labour, samples and co-ordinating work
with other trades, checking, examination, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and
protecting.
The unit prices shall include for all labour and work in narrow widths, cutting and fitting
around door frames, pipes and the like, cutting and fitting at boundaries.
35
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Carpet categories
Pile thickness
Mass of pile
in accordance with
ISO 1766
mm
G / m2
< 500
<5
5 +< 6
6 01 02
900
L
L
Levels of use
Carpets are classified as suitable for different levels of use as shown in the
following table (in accordance with EN 1307)
Level of use class
Use intensity
Examples of use
Domestic
6 01 03
Light use
Light domestic
General use
Normal domestic
Heavy use
Heavy domestic
Extra-heavy use
Commercial
General contract
Heavy contract
Durability
The assessed overall change of appearance is the difference between a fatigued and
an unfatigued specimen. Changes in structure, thickness, colour and/or pattern of a
textile floor covering may contribute to overall change in appearance. It is not always
36
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
possible to distinguish clearly between the factors since each may have an interaction
with others.
Carpets shall be tested in accordance with ISO/TR 10361 in either the Hexapod or the
Vettermann apparatus, using the following number of cycles for short and long-term
use according to carpet categories:
Category M and N
Short Term
Class
Long Term
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
3,0
3,0
4,0
3,5
Category L
Short Term
Long Term
5.000 cycles
Vettermann or
22.000 cycles
Vettermann or
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
Class
DSP =
Surface pile density
in g / cm3
Patterned carpets
2,5
0,10
0,12
4
Patterned carpets
2,5
37
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
03.0
Category L
Short Term
Class
Long Term
2,0
1,0
2,5
2,0
3,0
2,5
4,0
3,0
6 01 04
Fibre characteristics
Fibre
Fineness
Resilience
Abrasion
Resistance
Wool
Fine to coarse
Very good
Moderate
Polyamides
Fine to coarse
as required
Very good
Polyesters
Fine to coarse
as required
Polypropylene
Acrylics
Flammability
Main Use
Advantage
Soil
Resistance
Good handle,
drape and
tailoring
Good to
excellent
Excellent
Burns and
melts
Strong, tough,
can be heat-set
and is drip-dry
Fair
Very good
Very good
Burns and
melts
Similar to Nylon
Fair
Fine to coarse
as required
Poor
Very good
Burns and
melts
High waterrepellent
Excellent
Fine to coarse
as required
Good
Fairly good
Wool-like in
texture
Fair
38
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
39
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 01 05
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Stretched - In
Direct Glued - In
Yes
Yes
Axminster
Yes
Yes
Secondary-backed
Yes
Yes
Mono-backed
Yes
Yes
Foam-backed
Yes
Yes
Fiber-bonded
No
Yes
Stitched-bonded
No
Yes
Bonded
No
Yes
Bonded (secondary-backed)
Yes
Yes
Flocked
No
Yes
Knitted
No
Yes
Melded
No
Yes
Tiles
No
Yes
Tufted
Non-woven
40
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
6 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Figures
41
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
42
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Fig. 3: Skirting
43
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
44
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
45
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
46
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
47
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
General
Textile floor coverings are finished products laid out on prepared ground. Carpets are exposed to
mechanical, thermal and chemical strains. At the same time they are important for human environment
with effectiveness to sensory perception and consequently to the well being.
7 01 02
Design
7 01 02 01
Domestic design
Floor layout and specification should be based on the building type and occupational uses, e.g.:
-
Domestic installations will on average be reasonably small, however it is still necessary to draw up
adequate plans for the areas to be dealt with before laying commences. It is important to include details
of landings and stairs with the number of treads, where the directions of seams or lay of the pile is outside
normal practice, and method of installation and seaming.
7 01 02 01
Commercial design
Floor layout and specification should be based on the building type and occupational uses, e.g.:
-
Landings and stairs with the number of treads, where the direction of
seams or lay of the pile is outside normal practice, or when stairs and
landings are to be covered,
7 02 01 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
7 02 01 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
01.0
Pile carpet woven over wires (Velour): Pile carpet produced in a single
operation on a loom in which steel rods are used to form the pile and to
determine its length.
02.0
Plain weave carpets: Woven pile carpet with uniform pile length,
containing generally a single colour.
03.0
04.0
05.0
Carpet either cut or looped in which the pile yarns are fixed in a previously manufactured base
and then secured by coating or an adhesive.
7 02 01 03
Carpets made either on warp knitting machines (Raschel type) or weft knitting machines
(Wildman type). Latex is applied to the back for stability and tuft. An additional backing may
also be attached. Knitted carpets usually have solid or tweed colours with level-loop textures.
7 02 01 04
Pile carpet in which the pile consists for example of a pleated sheet of textile yarns or fibres
secured to a support by a coating or adhesive or directly to an adhesive, which forms the
support.
7 02 01 05
Flocked carpet
Made by propelling short strands of pile fibre usually Nylon electrostatically against an
adhesive coated prefabricated backing sheet. As many as 18.000 pile fibres per square inch
become vertically embedded in the adhesive before a secondary backing is laminated to the
fabric and the adhesive cured. The pile fibres can either be dyed prior to flocking or the
finished surface can be printed after fabrication.
7 02 01 06
Carpet obtained by knotting the pile forming yarns by hand or automatically using either
Persian or Turkish knots.
7 02 02
7 02 02 01
49
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
7 02 02 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Textile floor covering in which the use surface is composed of entangled textile materials
bonded together by a mechanical, physical or chemical process or by a combination of two or
more of these processes.
7 02 02 03
7 03 Carpet Fibres
7 03 01
Wool
Vegetable fibre nowadays often combined with other fibres especially nylon (often 80% wool /
20% nylon). Its preferences lay on its natural shine, high resilience and its excellent ability to
recover from crushing combined with good resistance to dirt and wear and its capability to selfextinguish when burnt. Through its capability to absorb humidity to one third of its own weight
it balances the indoor climate. At the same time, it becomes less electrostatically charged. The
abrasion resistance is less satisfying.
7 03 02
Nylon, Perlon
A chemical material made out of synthetic fibres (polyamide). Its virtue is its very high strength
and abrasion resistance. Added carbonisation makes the material nearly antistatically.
7 03 03
Acrylic
Acrylic (Dralon, Orlon) is the nearest substitute for wool. It is of high resilience and quite puffed,
has a good recover from crushing and an excellent fastness to light. However its abrasion
resistance is significantly lower than that of polyamide materials. Otherwise it is similar to
Nylon or Perlon.
7 03 04
Viscose
A chemical material made out of cellulose fibres. Viscose rayon has many inferiors to wool but is
used because of its low cost.
7 03 05
Polypropylene
Chemical material like Hostalen, Meraklon, Olefin made out of polypropylene fibres through
hydrocarbonisation. It has high water-repellent qualities ( therefore suitable for moist rooms),
high abrasion resistance, however less qualities to recover from crushing. It is mainly worked
into fleece material.
7 03 06
Polyester
High tensile strength material like Diolen, Trevira made out of polyester fibres through
esterification of ethyl glycol. It has high resistance to abrasion and soiling and good ability to
recover from crushing and wool-like finish. It is acid resistant and has easy care and waterrepellent qualities.
7 03 07
Vegetable Fibres
Vegetable fibres such as jute and sisal are used to make low-cost looped pile carpets.
7 03 08
Mineral Fibres
Mineral fibres are now used in a small percentage to dissipate electric charges, which are a
problem encountered in dry atmospheres.
50
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
7 05 Installation
7 05 01
Site conditions
Before starting to lay any textile floor covering materials, the position and depth of cables,
water pipes etc. should be ascertained and all preliminary work should be completed. The
base should be firm and dry and floors should be cleared of all debris. Dusty concrete should
be swept.
7 05 02
Product condition
Prior to installation, the textile floor covering materials, underlay and adhesives should be allowed
to become acclimatised to the site conditions in the laying area.
7 05 03
Direction of pile-lay
Where two or more pieces of the same textile floor covering are adjacent in the same area, the
direction of the pile-lay should be the same. Where a textile floor covering is being installed in
more than one area and/or level, the direction of pile may vary and full discussion be made
with all parties to decide pile directions essential at all times.
7 05 04
Direction of pattern
When patterned textile floor coverings are being installed it is recommended that wherever
possible they should be laid in accordance with the following;
The line of pattern should be installed with reference to datum lines, e.g. the longer walls of
perimeter of an area;
Patterns should be accurately matched and held in permanent register throughout interconnected
areas, including hall, stairs and landings;
If the pattern has a natural direction, it should relate to the major viewpoint, the stair-foot,
doorway or entrance to an area.
7 05 05
Domestic installations
It is essential that the need for extra materials to ensure pattern matching is made clear. At the
planning stage care should be taken to advise on the use of the optimum width of textile floor
covering in order to avoid wastage and also the introduction of unnecessary seams into the
floor covering.
7 05 06
Commercial installations
At an early stage a clear understanding should be reached with the client regarding the
amount of extra material that is necessary for pattern matching, centring of major motifs and
fitting purposes and the dimensional variations that exist or may occur in textile fabrics.
7 06 Methods of Installation
7 06 01
General
It is wholly flat and at even tension, this tension being such that it will not be displaced by the
movement of people or objects on its surface to the point where permanent slackness, racking
up or rippling is caused;
The hemmed, turned, trapped, whipped or sealed edges are accurately and closely fitted to all
skirting, architrave or other site perimeters;
At doorways, any necessary joints are made within the thickness or closure of the door;
Doorway terminations are secured by sealing, whipping or binding prior to seaming or finishing
with the appropriate edging or dividing strip, particularly if the materials are dissimilar or
mismatched;
51
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Cross-joints and raw edge seams are correctly matched, strengthened with cross-straps and
secured by sealing, whipping or binding prior to seaming;
If textile floor coverings are continued up the wall to skirting height, adequate provision is made
for covering and for protecting the exposed top edge of the materials, where necessary;
Wherever a base has to be drilled and plugged for the purpose of installing textile floor coverings,
carpet grippers, finishing strips, nosing or pins, the interval between plugs should not be
greater than 100 mm and the depth should not be greater than 32 mm.
7 06 02
Small angled pins projecting from a performed strip that is itself fixed to the sub-floor anchor the
textile floor covering. The length and number of pins required depend on the type of textile
floor covering being installed but normally should be 4mm above the carpet underlay. The
gripper should be fixed around the perimeter of the area close to the wall so that it leaves a
gap. For most textile coverings, a gap of 6 8mm is appropriate, and nothing should obstruct
the void so formed. The edges of the carpet are pushed down into the void so that they are
securely trapped between the gripper and the vertical surface. The points of the pins should
always lie towards the wall. Foam backed textile floor coverings require a special type of
carpet gripper with longer pins. It is essential that the grippers are firmly fixed to the floor.
When using stretched-in or carpet gripper method, the textile floor covering should always be
fitted under tension. In large areas and particularly those installations over 5 m long or wide
stretching should be achieved by use of power stretcher. When heavy contract textile floor
coverings are used, architectural carpet grippers or double strips of normal grippers fixed in
parallel should be employed. It is essential that stretching is in both directions and the textile
floor covering should not lift when it is fixed and in use under tension. It is important that the
underlay abuts the edge of the carpet gripper.
7 06 03
The floor should be sound, dry and free from contaminants, which will prevent adhesion.
The textile floor covering should be cut oversize (50 mm) to allow for trimming at the perimeter of
the area.
All edges to be seamed should be cut straight and square before adhesion.
The carpet should be adhered in accordance with the adhesive manufacturers instructions, the
choice of adhesive depending upon the type of textile floor covering being installed and upon
the base.
A flooring trowel notched and spaced should be used to spread the flooring adhesive evenly. The
adhesive should be applied only to an area that can be bonded within the open time of the
adhesive.
Carpets other than foam-backed materials should be rolled in both directions with a 68kg roller, or
in accordance with the adhesive manufacturers instructions.
The textile floor covering should be trimmed at the perimeter before the adhesive dries.
The carpet once fully adhered should be left for 24h before normal traffic and/or installation of
furniture.
7 06 04
Carpet tiles
7 06 04 01
Floor preparation
The sub-floor should be clean, dry, level and free from foreign matters, grease, wax etc.
52
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
7 06 04 02
ODAC
Section 09680 Carpet
Installation
Before cutting and installation carpet tiles should be allowed to condition for at least 24h in the
atmospheric conditions which will prevail during use. This is particularly important if the carpet
tiles have been stored or transported in conditions of extreme temperature or humidity.
Arrows on the back of the tiles usually indicate the pile direction in carpet tiles.
It is important that the tiles in the completed installation are correctly butted together.
Continual checks should be carried out to ensure that the tiles are placed together with correct
firmness, neither so loose as to allow gaps, nor so tight as to compress the tiles and cause
them to buckle.
Tiles cut into the walls should be as near as possible the same width on all four sides in order
to balance the installation.
All unprotected edges open to traffic should be protected using tile edging strip.
53
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
09900 - Painting
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this Section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with painting.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
02.0
Painting of plaster
03.0
Painting of gypsum-boards
04.0
05.0
06.0
Related Sections
08200
08600
09550
Wood Flooring
15050
16050
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
1 02 01 06
ISO 4618 - 1: 98
ISO 4618 - 2: 99
Paints and varnishes - Vocabulary Part 2: Terminology relating to initial defects and to
undesirable changes in films during ageing
ISO 8501 - 1: 98
British Standards
BS 2015: 92
BS 3416: 91
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
BS 4652: 95
BS 4756: 98
BS 4842: 84 (91)
BS 5082: 93
BS 5358: 93
BS 6496: 84 (91)
BS 6497: 84 (91)
BS 6949: 91
BS 6952
similar to BS EN 927
BS 6952 -1: 88 similar to BS EN 927 - 1
BS EN 927
BS EN 971
materials
BS EN 971 - 1: 96
BS EN 1062
1 02 02
Codes
BS 6150: 91
UBC
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Adhesive strength - the sum total of the forces of attachment between a dry film and its
substrate
Binder - the non-volatile part of the medium which forms the film
Built the thickness, either real or apparent, of the dry film of a coating material
Coating material - a product, in liquid or in paste or powder form that, when applied to a
substrate, forms a film possessing protective, decorative and/or other specific
properties
Coating system - the sum total of the coats of coating materials, which are to be applied, or
which have been applied to a substrate
Curing the process of condensation or polymerisation of a material by heat or chemical means
resulting in the full development of the desired properties
Film a continuous layer resulting from the application of one or more coat(s) to a substrate
Film formation the process by which coating materials, when applied to a substrate, are
transformed into a cohesive layer
Gloss - the optical property of a surface, characterised by its ability to reflect light specialarity
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Hiding power - the ability of a coating material to obliterate the colour or the colour differences of
a substrate
Opacity see hiding power!
Sagging a downward movement of a coat between application and setting, that results in an
uneven area of coat having a thick lower edge
Solvent a liquid, usually volatile, that is used in the manufacture of a coating material to
dissolve or disperse the constituents responsible for film formation and that
evaporates during drying
Thixotropic paint a coating material that, while free-flowing and easy to manipulate under the
brush, sets to a gel within a short time when it is allowed to remain at rest; because
of this property the material is less likely to drip from the brush and can be applied in
rather thicker films without running or sagging
Undercoating the layer applied after priming and filling, or after the preparation of a previously
painted surface and before application of the final coat
Varnish a transparent coating material based essentially on resins and/or drying oil and is
exclusively drying by oxidation
1 03 02
Abbreviations
deg.
degree (angle)
deg. C degree Celsius
max.
maximum
min.
minimum
QUV
value indicating the quality of a paint to resist ultra-violetradiation
RH
Relative Humidity
Sa
Designation of a surface preparation grade of a steel
surface treated by
localised blast-cleaning
St
Designation of a surface preparation grade of a steel surface
treated by localised hand and power-tool cleaning (except
machine abrading)
UL
Underwriters Laboratories (US)
WFT
Wet Film Thickness
1 05 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification Section
01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
Provide product data for each material proposed to be used, including manufacturers
technical
information,
label
analysis
and
application
instructions.
List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system and application.
Identify each material by manufacturers catalogue number and general classification.
Provide manufacturers certificates for all elements indicated showing compliance with
referenced Standards and requirements of local authorities.
1 05 03
Samples
Submit samples for initial colour selection in form of manufacturers colour charts to the
Engineer.
After colour selection, the Engineer will furnish a list of colours for the respective surfaces to
be coated.
Samples for verification: Provide samples of each colour, material and texture on
representative samples of the actual substrate of indicated size. Provide a list of material and
application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application.
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Resubmit until the required sheen, colour and texture are achieved.
The Engineer may request to prepare the samples on selected locations of the actual
structure.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturers
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in this work, with a history of successful production acceptable to the Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods
needed
for
proper
performance
of
work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced Standards and at least five
(5) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking of suppliers certificates of compliance to conform to specification and referenced
Standards prior to application or installation.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.
1 06 04 02
see 1 06 03 Certifications
1 07 02
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Products
Interior flat emulsion paint shall comply with BS 6150 : 91 or an equivalent Standard.
Gloss shall be < 10 % (60 deg. Angle).
Solids weight shall be min. 50 % .
Scrub resistance shall be min. 400 cycles.
Contrast ratio (Opacity) shall be 0,94 at 150 m WFT .
Application: By brush, roller or spray
Uniform surface finish when applied at 100 m WFT and allowed drying
Low odour
2 01 02
2 01 03
2 01 04
2 01 05
2 01 06
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
2 03 01 01
2 03 01 02
2 03 01 03
2 03 01 04
Alkyd-Based Undercoating
Alkyd-based undercoating paints are mainly used as a medium coat after the primer for a
following gloss or semi-gloss finish coat.
Alkyd-based undercoating paints shall comply with SASO 818 or an equivalent Standard. The
paint shall have a homogeneous consistency by normal manual stirring. Coating shall be
easy with a brush or a roller. In case of spraying the paint may be diluted at a ratio not
exceeding 10 % by volume with thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
01.0
Drying time: Surface dry after 4 hours; hard dry after 24 hours;
02.0
03.0
coat.
The colour of the applied undercoating shall be close to that of the final
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 03 01 05
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Alkyd Varnish
Alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss finish.
It shall be washable and have a good wear resistance.
2 03 01 06
Modified Alkyds
2 03 01 06 01
Urethane-Alkyd Varnish
Urethane-alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss
finish.
It shall be washable and have a high wear resistance.
2 03 02
2 03 02 01
Epoxy Coating
Epoxy coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following
properties:
- alkali resistance
- good abrasion resistance
- chemical resistance
Application by brush and spray
2 03 02 02
Polyurethane Coating
Polyurethane coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following
properties:
- superior weather resistance
- good abrasion resistance
- good colour and gloss retention.
2 04 Special Paints
2 04 01
Aluminium Paint
Aluminium paint is mainly used for painting fuel tanks. It reflects a good portion of the
suns radiation.
01.0
02.0
The paint shall, with stirring readily, form a smooth uniform mixture
suitable for application by brush, roller or spray. The paint shall not be
diluted for spraying by more than 5 % by volume.
03.0
Drying time: It shall be surface dry within 4 hours and hard dry within 24
hours.
04.0
05.0
06.0
07.0
2 04 02
Bituminous Paints
2 04 02 01
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Bituminous paint, suitable for the storage of potable water shall comply with BS 3416 or
an equivalent Standard.
2 04 02 02
2 04 03
02.0
Drying time: One thin coating layer shall be surface dry after 15 minutes
and shall be hard dry after 24 hours when tested according to GS 561.
03.0
04.0
2 04 04
2 04 04 01
Primer
2 04 04 02
01.0
02.0
2 04 04 03
01.0
02.0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
- Water repellent
- Good hiding power
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Execution
3 01 General Examination
Examine structure where work of this Section will be applied. Correct conditions detrimental
to the proper and timely completion of the work. Verify that materials to be used for the work
comply with requirements in specifications and schedules. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 General Preparation
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Surfaces to be painted shall be stable, firm, dry and free from dust, sand, loose old paint,
laitance, dirt, grease and oil. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that these
conditions are established by adequate cleaning procedures.
Whatever type of paint, procedures of application, pre-treatment and number of coatings are
specified, it is the Contractor's responsibility to check the actual conditions and state in
writing to the Engineer any incompatibility with the specified painting system.
Do not apply any coat if the climatic conditions are not within the temperature range or
humidity limits given by the manufacturer.
All adjoining areas not to be painted shall be masked and all necessary precautions taken to
prevent contamination of same.
3 03 02
3 03 02 01
External Painting
Substrates of concrete, masonry or cement-based rendering shall receive a primer or sealer,
water- or solvent-borne, depending on the subsequent coats. The primer/sealer shall have
alkali resistance, good binding and sealing properties and shall be from the same
manufacturer as the subsequent coats.
Apply intermediate and final coat of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines
for application method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application
method as has been used for the samples and approved by the Engineer.
If a textured coat has to be applied, there shall be only one coat unless otherwise indicated.
Make sure, that the used application method results in a film thickness similar to
manufacturer's data.
Before application of paints with no or low vapour permeability make sure that the substrate
is fully cured and has reached a moisture content of less than 4%.
3 03 02 02
Internal Painting
Substrates of concrete, masonry, plaster or gypsum board shall receive a primer/sealer if
required to establish a uniform absorptive capacity.
Gypsum boards, unless otherwise indicated, shall receive a coat of waterborne filler before
the application of a primer or final coats. It shall be applied by steel trowel and result in a
smooth and even finish. For wet rooms use only fillers which are recommended by the
manufacturer for this purpose (e.g. acrylic based fillers).
Apply two coats of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines for application
method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application method as has
been used for the samples and approved by the Engineer.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3 03 03
Painting of Steel
3 03 03 01
Primed Steel
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Steel which has previously been primed, e.g. shop primed, shall be thoroughly checked for
any defects. Surface preparation shall include degreasing and removal of contaminants.
Damaged and rusted areas shall be sanded off and re-primed with the same primer used in
first place.
Apply intermediate and final coat of paint indicated. Make sure that these coats are
compatible with the primer applied previously. Use application method which best fits the
purpose and the requirements of the final finish, and make sure that it is also recommended
by the manufacturer.
3 03 03 02
Galvanized Steel
3 03 03 02 01
Spray-painting
Carry out surface preparation as recommended by manufacturer of primer. Apply one coat of
primer recommended by the manufacturer for galvanized surfaces. Apply intermediate and
final coat of paint indicated. Make sure that these coats are compatible with the primer.
Spray- painting, airless or air-spray, are the preferred application methods for steel, unless
the actual circumstances do not allow using these methods.
3 03 03 02 02
Powder-Organic Coating
Powder organic coating of galvanized steel shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements
of BS 6497 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 03 03
Untreated Steel
3 03 03 03 01
Cleaning
The most important measure for reaching a long service life for painting on steel is cleaning.
ISO 8501 defines several preparation grades of un-coated steel.
Clean steel substrates to a cleaning degree as indicated, based upon the methods and
consequent results designated in ISO 8501.
Where appropriate, ensure that manufacturers recommended surface profile is achieved.
3 03 03 03 02
Painting
Apply painting system of one manufacturer consisting of a primer and two finishing coats of
type and quality indicated.
3 03 04
Painting of Aluminium
Aluminium building components like windows, doors etc. shall generally be delivered to site
with the final paint finish. They shall therefore be handled carefully to avoid any damage. Any
repair by patch painting on site has to be approved by the Engineer.
3 03 04 01
Spray-Painting
Painting of aluminium shall generally be shop-applied, by either airless- or air-spraying
method with type of painting system indicated, and meet the requirements of BS 4842 or an
equivalent Standard.
3 03 04 02
Powder-Organic Coating
Powder organic coating of aluminium shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements of BS
6496 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 05
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
type has been applied, or if not, as recommended by the manufacturer of the indicated
painting system.
01.0
02.0
03.0
Joinery wood stain of indicated type and colour shall be applied in two
coats on the primed substrate. Transparent wood stain shall not be used
on external surfaces.
3 03 06
Special Applications
3 03 06 01
Aluminium Paint
Aluminium paint shall be applied on the appropriately primed surface, depending on the type
of substrate to be painted and the recommendations of the paints manufacturer. For steel
substrates follow the requirements under Painting of Steel, unless otherwise indicated.
Apply two coats of specified paint by brush, roller or spray. Do not dilute the paint more than
5 % by volume for spray application.
3 03 06 02
Bituminous Paint
3 03 06 02 01
Cementitious Substrate
3 03 06 02 02
3 03 06 03
01.0
Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, mould release agents, and any other
contamination. Avoid washing these substrates surfaces must be
thoroughly dry before application of paint.
02.0
03.0
Steel Substrate
01.0
02.0
03.0
Road Marking
Areas of application shall be cleaned thoroughly to be free from oil, grease and dirt. Apply
road-marking paint of indicated colour. Follow manufacturers guidelines for application
procedure and make sure that the recommended dry-film thickness is met.
3 06 Demonstration
3 07 Protection
Protect completed work from dust, dirt and damage as appropriate until handing over.
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
3 08 Schedules
Contractor shall provide schedules of his works, co-ordinated with other trades, prior to
commencing with painting.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
4 02 Units of Measurement
2
Painting on walls, ceilings and floors will be measured by m , separate for different
substrates and paint systems.
Reveals of openings > 2,0 m2 will be measured by m2.
Doors will be either measured by m2, or enumerated for different sizes and paint systems.
Door frames will be measured by m2 with the girth of the surface, or enumerated for each
type, size and painting system.
Window grilles, rolling shutters (grilles), railing with mainly vertical rods, grits, fences will be
measured by m2.
Surfaces of profiles, corrugated sheets etc. will be measured by m2.
Railings construct out of pipes will be measured by m length separate for different diameters.
Stair stringers will be measured by m length separate for different sizes
Road marking will be measured by m length, separate for different width and colour.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
Physically
Chemical
oxidative
Chemically
e.g. epoxy
sensitive to
solvents in
general incl.
their own
solvent;
yet emulsion
paints cannot
be dissolved
by water after
generally
consisting of
Sa 2
Sa 2
Thorough blast-cleaning
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible
oil, grease and dirt, and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign
matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering (see note 2).
Sa 1
Thorough blast-cleaning
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible
oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint
coatings and foreign matter (see note 2).
St 3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
St 2
ODAC
Section 09900 Painting
St 1
1.
The term foreign matter may conclude water-soluble salts and welding
residues. These contaminants cannot always be completely removed
from the surface by dry blast-cleaning, hand and power tool or flame
cleaning; wet blast-cleaning or hydro-jetting may be necessary.
2.
17
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 09910 PAINTING & DECORATION
PAGE
1.
GENERAL .................................................................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.
PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. 7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3.
SCOPE ................................................................................................. 2
REFERENCES ........................................................................................ 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................ 5
SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................... 5
PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORING .................................................... 6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ............................................................... 6
SAFETY AND HEALTH ............................................................................. 7
GENERAL.............................................................................................. 7
EXTERIOR PAINT ................................................................................... 7
INTERIOR PAINT .................................................................................... 7
PUTTY .................................................................................................. 8
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................. 8
PAINT SCHEDULES ................................................................................ 8
EXECUTION ................................................................................................. 9
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
The specifications cover paint work to exposed concrete and
rendered surfaces, wood work and metal in accordance with the
Finish Schedule, Drawings, and as directed by the Engineer.
All painting, works shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced
in this work.
The extent for painting work is shown in the drawings and schedule
and is as specified herewith.
The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior
exposed items and faces throughout the entire project, except as
specified herewith.
The surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in
addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other
Sections, except as otherwise specified
Paint all exposed surfaces, whether or not colors are designated in
""schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is
obviously intended and specifically noted as a surface not to be
painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned paint
these the same as adjacent signaler materials or areas. If colour or
finish is not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard
colors available for the materials systems as specified.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified all new surfaces to be
painted shall receive not less than one shop, or one site prime coat
and two finishing coats of an appropriate paint.
1.2
References
Federal Specifications (FS)
FS P-W- 155
FS TT-C-535
FS TT-C-542
(Rev E) coating,
moisture curing.
FS TT-C-555
FS TT-E-487
polyurethane,
oil-free,
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
FS TT-E-489
FS TT-E-496
FS TT-E-505
FS TT-E-506
FS TT-E-508
FS TT-E-509
FS TT-E-545
FS TT-F-1098
FS TT-P-19
FS TT-P-24
FS TT-P-28
FS TT-P-29
FS TT-P-30
FS TT-P-31
FS TT-P-37
FS TT-P-38
FS TT-P-91
FS TT-P-95
FS TT-P-102
FS TT-P-645
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
FS TT-P-650
FS TT-P-1510
FS TT-P-1511
FS TT-P-001984
FS TT-P-002119
FS TT-S-176
FS TT-S-708
FS TT-S-711
FS TT-S-001992
FS TT-V-51
FS TT-V-85
FS TT-V-86
FS TT-V-109
FS TT-V-119
FS TT-V-121
MS MIL-C-83286
Zinc
Dust
MS MIL-P-28577
MS MIL-P-28578
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1.3
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
MS MIL-P-28582
MS MIL-S-12935
Quality Assurance
1.3.1 Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing
quality paints and finish products with three (3) years
experience.
1.3.2 Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and
finishing with three (3) years documented experienced and
accepted by product manufacturer.
1.3.3 Arrange with the paint manufacturers representative to visit
the site prior to the commencement of the painting operation
to discuss the painting and finishing procedures to be used
and to analyze the surface conditions in order that alternative
recommendations may be made to the Engineer, should
adverse conditions exist.
1.3.4 Arrange with the paint manufacturer to visit the site at intervals
during the surface preparation and painting operations to
insure that the proper surface preparation has been
completed, the specified paint products are being used, the
proper number of coats are being applied and the agreed
finishing procedures are being used, and that the paint
manufacturer regularly submits written reports to the Engineer.
1.3.5 Apply samples of finishes in the testing area in the presence of
the Engineer, Contractor and paint manufacturer. Apply the
samples with the correct material, number of coats, colour,
texture and degree of gloss required. Refinish if required, until
acceptance of the Engineer is obtained.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1 Mixing and thinning;
Manufacturers current printed product description, material safety
data sheets and technical data sheets for each coating system.
Detailed mixing, thinning and application instructions, minimum and
maximum application temperature, and curing and drying times
between coats for epoxy, moisture curing polyurethane, and liquid
glaze coatings. Detailed application instructions for textured coatings
shall be provided.
1.4.2 Certificates
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
Moisture-curing polyurethane
A complete moisture-curing polyurethane system applied to a
panel of the same material as that on which the coating will be
applied in the work and for each color specified. The sample
panels will be used for quality control in applying the system.
ii)
Paint
While the material is at the site or source of supply, and at a
time agreeable to the contractor and the Engineer, a I liter
sample of each color and batch except for quantities of 200
liters or less, shall be taken by random selection from the
sealed containers. The contents of the containers to be
sampled shall be thoroughly mixed to ensure that the sample is
representative. Samples shall be identified by designated name,
specification number, manufacturer name and address, batch
number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity
involved.
1.5
1.6
Environmental Conditions
Unless otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer, the
ambient temperature shall be between 7 and 35 degrees C when
applying coatings other than water-thinned, epoxy, and moisturecuring polyurethane coatings. Water-thinned coatings shall be
applied only when ambient temperature is between 10 and 32
degrees C. Epoxy, and moisture-curing polyurethane coatings shall
be applied only within the minimum and maximum temperatures
recommended by the coating manufacturer. Moisture-curing
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
2.
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
Paint includes vinyl, emulsions, enamels, paints, stains, varnishes,
sealers, cement-emulsion filler, and other coatings, whether used as
prime, intermediate, or finish coat.
2.2
Exterior Paint
Vinyl emulsion based rough textured finish impregnated with quartz
and aggregates for exterior facades providing a tough, highly durable
long lasting weather resistant finish, giving a special scratch effect
and fast drying finish with no disagreeable odor. Paint can be applied
directly to fair-faced concrete, cement plasters, masonry surfaces.
Porous surfaces shall be sealed by primer before painting.
2.3
Interior Paint
-
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2.4
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
Putty
Already to use Acrelic and oil based putty for filling holes and cracks
and for making surfaces even on interior and exterior drywalls,
plaster, concrete and wooden surfaces.
2.5
Additional Requirements
i) Colors and Tints
Colors shall be as selected from manufacturers standard colors,
as indicated. Manufacturers standard color is for identification of
color only. Tinting of epoxy, and urethane paints shall be done by
the manufacturer. Stains shall conform in shade to manufacturers
standard color. The color of the undercoats shall vary slightly from
the color of the next coat.
ii) Lead
Paints containing lead in excess of 0.06 percent by weight of the
total nonvolatile content shall not be used.
iii) Chromium
Paints containing zinc chromate or strontium chromate pigments
shall not be used.
2.6
Paint Schedules
The following painting schedules identify the surfaces to be painted
and prescribe the paint to be used and the number of coats of paint
to be applied.
2.6.1 Exterior Paint Schedule
i)
ii) Metal
Flat, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over rust-inhibitive primer.
Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over rust inhibitive
primer.
iii) Zinc-Coated Metal
Gloss/Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over galvanized
metal primer.
2.6.2 Interior Paint Schedule
i)
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
iii) Metal
Full Gloss, Alkyed Enamel: Two coats over coater and primer.
iv) Zinc Coated Metal
Semi gloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.
3.
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
Surface Preparation
Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of foreign matter
before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and grease shall
be removed with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to
mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of low toxicity with a
flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C. Cleaning shall be programmed
so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted
surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact
with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spotprimed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for
the adjacent areas.
3.2.1 Concrete, Stucco and Masonry Surfaces
Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to dry at
least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on grade which
shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting. Glaze,
efflorescence, laitance, dirt, grease, oil, asphalt, surface deposits of
free iron and other foreign matter shall be removed prior to painting.
Surfaces to receive polyurethane, chlorinated rubber or epoxy
coatings shall be acid-etched or mechanically abraded as specified
by the coating manufacturer, rinsed with water, allowed to dry, and
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
3.4
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable state and local laws
enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint
manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. At the
time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform
suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application. Each
coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness
and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids,
laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Hiding
shall be complete. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of
a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to
that of adjacent painted surfaces. Paints, except water-thinned types,
shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture
as determined by sight or touch.
3.4.1 Ventilation
Affected areas shall be ventilated during paint application so that
workers exposure to chemical substances shall not exceed limits ofapplicable regulation. Interior work zones having a volume of 280
cubic meters or less shall be ventilated at a minimum of 2 air
exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones shall be
maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be
exhausted outdoors, away from air intakes and workers. Return air
inlets in the work zone shall be temporarily sealed before start of
work until the coatings have dried.
3.4.2 Respirators
Operators and personnel in the vicinity of operating paint sprayers
shall wear respirators.
3.4.3 First Coat
The first coat on plaster, gypsum wallboard, and other surfaces shall
include repeated touching up of suction spots or overall application of
primer or sealer to produce uniform color and gloss. Excess sealer
shall be wiped off after each application. The first coat on both faces
of wood doors shall be applied at essentially the same time. Glazed
doors and sashes shall be given the specified coating system within
3 weeks of the time they are glazed, but not before the glazing
material has set. Each varnish coat shall be sanded lightly prior to
application of subsequent coats.
3.4.4 Timing
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise
prepared for painting shall be given a coat of the specified first coat
12
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
3.4.6 Fillers
Concrete and masonry surface voids shall be filled; however, surface
irregularities need not be completely filled. The dried filler shall be
uniform and free of pinholes. Filler shall not be applied over caulking
compound.
i)
Cement-Emulsion Filler
Immediately before filler application, surfaces shall be dampened
uniformly and thoroughly, with no free surface water visible, by
several applications of potable water with a fog spray, allowing
time between the sprayings for water to be absorbed. Cementemulsion filler shall be scrubbed into the surface vigorously with
a stiff-bristled brush having tampico or palmyra bristles not longer
than 63mm. At least 24 hours shall elapse before applying
exterior emulsion paint over cement-emulsion filler. When he
ambient temperature is over 29 degrees C, cement-emulsion
filler surfaces shall be dampened lightly with a fog spray of
potable water immediately prior to application of the subsequent
paint coat.
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09910 painting & decoration
Scaffolding
All scaffolds, staging and rigging required for work shall comply with
all applicable laws and codes, as further specified in the Contract
Documents.
3.6
Protection
Furnish and lay suitable plastic sheets and canvas cloths, in all areas
where painting is executed to protect floors and all other surfaces
from damage during the work.
lighting
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Division
09 - Finishes
Section
Part 1:
General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials, and
performing all operations in connection with providing and hanging of wall coverings.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Wallpaper
02.0
03.0
Related Sections
09200
09250
09680
1 02
References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
1 02 01 05
ASTM E 84: 01
ASTM F 793:93
ASTM F 1141:98
European Standards
EN 235: 89
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 1248: 90
BS 1494-1: 64
BS 8000-12: 89
BS EN 233: 97
BS EN 234: 89
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 02 02
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
BS EN 259: 87
BS EN 266: 92
Codes
UBC 805: 97
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
1 03 01 01
General Terms
Base web: That part of a multi-layer wall covering intended to contact the support.
Finished wall covering: Wall covering that is not intended to be decorated after hanging.
Impact resistance: Ability of a heavy-duty wall covering to maintain its surface intact under the
effect of impacts. A wall covering may be claimed to be impact resistant if it satisfies the
impact resistance requirements of EN 259, the appropriate symbols to accompany such a
claim is serial 7.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Means of application: Method by which the wall covering is to be attached to the support
during hanging, i.e. the surface(s) to which a suitable adhesive has to be applied, or has
already been applied and requires activation. The appropriate symbols to indicate means
of application are serials 5.1 to 5.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Overlap and double cut: Method by which the edges of adjoining lengths of wall covering can
be made to butt together. The adjoining edges of adjacent lengths of wall covering are
overlapped on the support during application and both thickness are cut through in a
continuous movement with a sharp knife. The joint is opened and surplus wall covering
material removed before the adjoining edges are realigned. The appropriate symbols to
indicate advice to overlap and double cut is serial 7.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Spongeability: The property of a wall covering to wipe off the hanging adhesive whilst it is still
damp from the front face of the wall covering with a damp cloth or sponge without causing
visible damage. Accordingly the wall covering when tested in accordance with EN 233
annex C shall exhibit no damage or change, in comparison with the reference piece, that
would detract from its appearance as a wall covering on a wall. The symbol to be used to
indicate this degree of spongeability is shown as serial 1.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Support: Surface to which the wall covering is applied, e.g. wall or ceiling. This is indicated by a
thick solid line in appropriate symbols (see table 1 Annex 6 01 01).
Wall covering: All forms of flexible webs supplied in strips in roll form for hanging onto walls or
ceilings by means of an adhesive covering the whole of the interface between the wall
covering and the support. Tapestries and other similar wall hangings are excluded.
Wall covering for subsequent decoration: Wall covering intended for decoration after
hanging, for example, by the application of paint. They are normally relief or ingrain wall
coverings. These wall coverings do not, in general, have as good a washability and colour
fastness to light before their subsequent decoration as have finished wall coverings.
Wall lining: Wall covering intended to serve as a preparatory layer on the support prior to the
application of a finished wall covering or a wall covering for subsequent decoration.
Washability: A wall covering is claimed to be washable during its life after hanging, according
to its grade of washability, it shall be termed washable, extra-washable or scrubbable.
Accordingly the wall covering when tested in accordance with EN 233 annex C shall exhibit
no visible damage or change, in comparison with the reference piece, that would detract
from its appearance as a wall covering on a wall. The symbol to be used to indicate this
degree of washability is shown as serial 2.1 to 2.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 03 01 02
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Terminology
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
01.0
02.0
Ink embossed wall covering: Finished relief wall covering, which has
been simultaneously printed and mechanically embossed.
03.0
04.0
Blown vinyl, printed: Finished relief wall covering where the three
dimensional design or structure is made by foaming a layer and/or
deposit of polyvinyl chloride or other polymeric material.
05.0
Textured wall covering: Finished wall covering where materials like grass, cork or granulates
of organic or inorganic material are fixed onto a base material.
Terms for Cleanability
Spongeable wall covering: Wall covering from which the hanging adhesive may be wiped off
the front face with a damp cloth or sponge at the time of hanging without causing visible
damage providing it is done whilst the adhesive is still damp. No subsequent washability is
claimed or implied. All wall covering may be claimed to be spongeable if it satisfies the
requirements of clause 5 of EN 233, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is
serial 1.1 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Washable wall covering: Finished wall covering from which dirt and some domestic water
based stains may be cleaned carefully from the front face with a damp cloth and soapy
water. Oils, fats and solvent-based stains are not expected to be removable. All wall
covering may be claimed to be washable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN
233, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.1 of table 1 (see Annex
6 01 01).
Extra-washable wall covering: Finished wall covering from which dirt and most domestic
water based stains may be cleaned from the front face with a wet cloth and soapy water.
Oils, fats and solvent-based stains are not expected to be removable, but some greasy
stains may be removed if action is taken immediately after contamination. All wall covering
may be claimed to be extra-washable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN 233,
the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.2 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01
01).
Scrubbable wall covering: Finished wall covering of superior cleanability from which dirt and
most domestic water based stains may be cleaned from the front face with a sponge or soft
brush and a mild detergent or a mild abrasive. Oil, fats and certain solvent based stains
may also be removed if tackled immediately after contamination.. All wall covering may be
claimed to be scrubbable if it satisfies the requirements of clause 6 of EN 233, the
appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is serial 2.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
Extra-scrubbable wall covering: Finished wall covering of superior cleanability from which dirt
and all domestic water based stains may be cleaned from the front face by intensive
treatment with a sponge or a soft brush and a mild detergent or a mild abrasive. Oil, fats
and certain solvent-based stains may also be removed if tackled immediately after
contamination. All wall covering may be claimed to be extra-scrubbable if it satisfies the
washability requirements of EN 259, the appropriate symbol to accompany such a claim is
serial 2.4 of table 1 (see Annex 6 01 01).
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
accompany a claim of moderate colour fastness to light is serial 3.2 of table 1 (see Annex 6
01 01).
Good colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 5 when this property is
determined by the method given in annex D of EN 233. The appropriate symbol to
accompany a claim of moderate colour fastness to light is serial 3.3 of table 1 (see Annex 6
01 01).
Very good colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 6 when this property is
determined by the method given in annex D of EN 233. The appropriate symbol to
accompany a claim of moderate colour fastness to light is serial 3.4 of table 1 (see Annex 6
01 01).
Excellent colour fastness: Colour fastness to light of numerical rating 7 when this property is
determined by the method given in annex D of EN 233. The appropriate symbol to
accompany a claim of moderate colour fastness to light is serial 3.5 of table 1 (see Annex 6
01 01).
1 05
Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and specification according to
Section 01300.
1 05 01
Product Data
1 05 01 01
1 05 01 02
01.
Commercial references
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Spongeability
Washability
Means of application
Method of removal
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
6
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
03.
1 05 01 03
Means of application
Method of removal
1 05 01 04
01.
Commercial references
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Impact resistance
Washability
Means of application
Method of removal
1 05 01 05
01.
Commercial references
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
Colour
Means of application
Method of removal
Commercial references
02.
Characteristics
-
Roll width
Total thickness
Total weight
7
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
1 05 01 06
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Colour
Spongeability
Washability
Means of application
Method of removal
Adhesive
Provide product data and Manufacturers instructions for each type of adhesive.
Give sufficient information in order the products can be used safely and without risk to health.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
1 05 03
Samples
Submit at least 3 samples for initial purposes illustrating colour, finish, and texture.
Provide panel of 5m2, full height, illustrating installed covering, joint seaming technique and locate
where directed.
1 05 04
1 06 Quality Assurance
1 06 01
Qualifications
1 06 01 01
Qualifications of Manufacturer
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged
in manufacture of wall coverings and with a history of successful production acceptable to the
Engineer.
1 06 01 02
Qualifications of Installer
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of work.
Contractors site supervisor(s) shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5)
years of documented experience.
1 06 02 01
Fire Behaviour
Conform to Uniform Building code 805 or other applicable code for flame and smoke ratings.
Test results shall be provided by an approved testing agency to show surface burning
characteristics and to show that materials when fastened in place become detached when
subjected to temperature of 149o Celsius for 25 minutes.
8
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
When used as interior wall finish, textile wall coverings, including materials such as those having
a napped, tufted, looped, non-woven, woven or similar surface, shall have Class 1 flame spread
(in accordance to UBC 805) and shall be protected by automatic sprinklers.
Foam plastics shall not be used as interior finish.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors internal quality control shall include but not be limited to:
Checking suppliers / manufacturers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform
to specification and referenced standards prior to application or installation.
Checking Suppliers delivery tickets for compliance with supply order and specification.
1 07 02
Environmental Requirements
Use ecologically desirable solvent free adhesives if type of wall covering and surface of the
support allow doing so.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the adhesive or vinyl covering product manufacturer.
Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during and after installation of adhesive and
covering.
The migration of some heavy metals, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with Test A
specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed the following values:
-
Antimony
20
Arsenic
Barium
500
Cadmium
25
Chromium
60
9
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Mercury
20
Lead
90
Selenium
163
The Limit for Antimony does not apply for fire-resistant coverings with a rating test report.
The vinyl chloride monomer content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with Test B
specified in prEN 12149 shall not exceed 0,2.
The Formaldehyde content, in mg / kg of wall covering, in accordance with test C specified in
prEN 12149 shall not exceed 120.
Provide 5 10% of total area to be covered as spare wall covering of each type, colour and
pattern specified where indicated in the B.o.Q.
Package and label each roll by manufacturer, colour and pattern, and destination room
number.
10
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Products
2 01 01 01
2 01 01 02
02.
03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be 5,326 m2
04.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 32,50 or 60 cm.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Adhesives
01.
02.
03.
Termination trim
2 01 01 03
Substrate filler
2 01 01 04
2 01 02
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be 5,326 m2
11
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 02 01
2 01 02 02
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
02.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 cm unless
otherwise indicated by the Engineer.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
Antimony
20
Arsenic
Barium
500
Cadmium
25
Chromium
60
Mercury
20
Lead
90
Selenium
163
12.
13.
Adhesives
01.
02.
03.
Substrate filler
2 01 02 03
2 01 03
02.
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be declared.
Deviation from declared values shall be not more than
04.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 or 60 cm.
05.
06.
07.
08.
2 01 03 01
2 01 03 02
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Adhesives
01.
02.
03.
Termination trim
2 01 03 03
Substrate filler
2 01 03 04
2 01 04
02.
03.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be declared with a
permitted deviation from the declared value not more than 3%.
04.
05.
06.
13
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 04 01
2 01 04 02
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
07.
Textile wall covering shall have Class 1 flame spread (in accordance
with UBC 805)
08.
09.
10.
11.
12.
Adhesives
01.
02.
03.
Termination trim
2 01 04 03
Substrate filler
2 01 04 04
2 01 05
02.
03.
04.
Provide wallpaper roll stock. The area of the roll shall be 5,326 m2
05.
The nominal width of the rolls shall be not less than 50 and not greater
than 53cm.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
2 01 05 01
2 01 05 02
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
14.
15.
16.
Adhesives
01.
02.
03.
Termination trim
2 01 05 03
Substrate filler
2 01 05 04
15
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 3:
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Execution
3 01 Examination
In general, follow the manufacturers sitework instructions for all proprietary materials used in
the preparation of surfaces.
Verify that wall surfaces are dry smooth and flat within specified tolerances and are ready to
receive work.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
coverings unless moisture content of surfaces is below recommend maximums.
If, during the course of work, any surface or substrate is found to be unsound obtain
instructions immediately.
3 02 General Preparation
3 02 01
3 02 02
3 02 03
16
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
Do not commence hanging until: the work of all tradesmen, which might affect the surfaces to
be covered, is completed; the surfaces to be covered have dried out; efflorescence has
ceased; the painting of adjacent surfaces is complete and dry.
As far as practicable, before, during and after hanging, maintain the temperature and humidity
at levels approximating to those which will prevail after the building is occupied.
Do not use accelerate drying after hanging decorative wall coverings.
Use wall coverings in roll number sequence.
If wall coverings are delivered untrimmed, trim off the selvedge neatly to give a true straight
edge, unless manufacturers hanging instructions require joints to be formed by overlapping
and cutting through.
Razor trim edges on flat worktable. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.
Apply covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure
full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight.
Do not seam within 50 mm of internal corners or within 150 mm of external corners.
Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors in sequence from roll.
3 03 02
3 03 03
Adhesives
Use only adhesives stated by the wall coverings manufacturer to be suitable for the type of
wall covering to be hung.
Prepare adhesives in accordance with the manufacturers sitework instructions.
Use fungicidal adhesives in accordance with the manufacturers sitework instructions
wherever the wall covering is to be hung on a surface previously affected by mould; for
impermeable wall coverings like vinyl wall coverings; for all wall coverings to concrete or
plaster containing lime and for wall coverings in areas that may be humid.
Paste adhesive evenly over the whole surface of the wall covering and / or the wall, as
directed by the manufacturers sitework instructions.
Allow sufficient time, as recommended by the wall covering manufacturers sitework
instructions, between pasting and hanging.
Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next covering sheet.
Wipe clean with dry cloth.
3 05
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
3 07 Protection
Do not permit work at or near finished covered areas..
3 08 Schedules
Prior to commencing of installation, contractor shall provide finish schedules of his works, coordinated with other trades, and defining where the wall coverings are be laid out.
18
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Part 4:
Method of Measurement
4 01
General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings.
Where work is measured by area, no deductions shall be made for void less than 1m2.
4 02
Units of Measurement
Wall coverings according to type, material, thickness and finish will be measured by m2.
Termination trims will be measured according to type by length (m).
19
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
Cutting, fitting and hanging around door frames, windows, pipes and the
like.
02.
20
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
21
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Section 09 950 Wall coverings
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 09 : FINISHES
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
Foreword
General Requirements
Division 02:
Site work
Division 03:
Concrete
Division 04:
Masonry
Division 05:
Metals
Division 06:
Division 07:
Division 08:
Division 09:
Finishes
Division 14:
Conveying Systems
Division 15:
Mechanical
Division 16:
Electrical
Each Division comprises a number of related Sections. For example: Division 08 includes eight sections.
They are:
08100
08200
08300
Special Doors
08400
08500
Metal Windows
08600
08700
Hardware
08800
Glazing
General: This is mainly concerned with the references, quality control, submittals, programs,
and maintenance.
2
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
Part 2:
ODAC
Products: This gives a breakdown of material used in addition to their properties and place of
installation.
Part 3:
Execution: The most significant items in this Part are the execution and installation of the
works, field quality control, as well as cleaning and protection methods.
Part 4:
Methods of Measurement: This indicates the measurement units and the measuring methods
that shall be used for the Bills of Quantities.
Part 5:
Basis of Payment: This indicates the work that shall be completed for each item of the Bills of
Quantities. It also indicates the ancillary works to be included in the unit price rate.
Part 6:
3
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
4
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 09 Finishes
ODAC
INDEX
09250
Gypsum Board
09300
Tile
09400
Terrazzo
09450
Stone Facing
09500
Acoustical Treatments
09545
09550
Wood Flooring
09650
Resilient Flooring
09680
Carpet
09900
Painting
09950
Wall Coverings
5
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV